EAI2

For Oracle internal distribution only
Integration Platform
Technologies: Siebel
Enterprise Application
Integration
Version 8.1
March 2008
Copyright 2005, 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.
The Programs (which include both the software and documentation) contain proprietary information;
they are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are also
protected by copyright, patent, and other intellectual and industrial property laws. Reverse engineering,
disassembly, or decompilation of the Programs, except to the extent required to obtain interoperability
with other independently created software or as specified by law, is prohibited.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems
in the documentation, please report them to us in writing. This document is not warranted to be error-
free. Except as may be expressly permitted in your license agreement for these Programs, no part of
these Programs may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, for any purpose.
PRODUCT MODULES AND OPTIONS. This guide contains descriptions of modules that are optional and
for which you may not have purchased a license. Siebels Sample Database also includes data related to
these optional modules. As a result, your software implementation may differ from descriptions in this
guide. To find out more about the modules your organization has purchased, see your corporate
purchasing agent or your Oracle sales representative.
If the Programs are delivered to the United States Government or anyone licensing or using the Programs
on behalf of the United States Government, the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS. Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical
data delivered to U.S. Government customers are "commercial computer software" or "commercial
technical data" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific
supplemental regulations. As such, use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation of the
Programs, including documentation and technical data, shall be subject to the licensing restrictions set
forth in the applicable Oracle license agreement, and, to the extent applicable, the additional rights set
forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software--Restricted Rights (June 1987). Oracle USA,
Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.
The Programs are not intended for use in any nuclear, aviation, mass transit, medical, or other inherently
dangerous applications. It shall be the licensee's responsibility to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup,
redundancy and other measures to ensure the safe use of such applications if the Programs are used for
such purposes, and we disclaim liability for any damages caused by such use of the Programs.
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other names may be
trademarks of their respective owners.
The Programs may provide links to Web sites and access to content, products, and services from third
parties. Oracle is not responsible for the availability of, or any content provided on, third-party Web sites.
You bear all risks associated with the use of such content. If you choose to purchase any products or
services from a third party, the relationship is directly between you and the third party. Oracle is not
responsible for: (a) the quality of third-party products or services; or (b) fulfilling any of the terms of
the agreement with the third party, including delivery of products or services and warranty obligations
related to purchased products or services. Oracle is not responsible for any loss or damage of any sort
that you may incur from dealing with any third party.
Contents
Integration Platform Technologies: Siebel Enterprise Application Integration 1
Chapter 1: Whats New in This Release
Chapter 2: Integration Objects

About Integration Object Terminology 13
About Integration Objects 14
About Integration Object Base Object Types 15
About the Difference Between Integration Objects and Integration Object Instances
16
About Integration Object Wizards 16
About the Structure of Integration Objects 18
Integration Components and Associations 20
Multivalue Groups Within Business Components 21
Validation of Integration Component Fields and Picklists 26
Calculated Fields and Integration Objects 27
Inner Joins and Integration Components 28
Operation Controls for Integration Components 28
Defining Field Dependencies 29
Setting Primaries Through Multivalue Links 29
Repository Objects 29
Integration Component Keys 29
About Permission Flags for Integration Components 35
About EAI Siebel Adapter Access Control 36
Chapter 3: Creating and Maintaining Integration Objects

About the Integration Object Builder 37
About the EAI Siebel Wizard Business Service 38
Creating Integration Objects Using the EAI Siebel Wizard Business Service 40
Creating an Integration Object Based on Another Root Business Component 43
Creating an Integration Object with Many-To-Many Relationships 44
Configuring Integration Objects 45
Integration Platform Technologies: Siebel Enterprise Application 3

Integration Version 8.1
Contents
Validating Integration Objects 45

Testing Integration Objects 45
Deploying Integration Objects to the Run-Time Database 46
About Synchronizing Integration Objects 47
Synchronization Rules 48
Updating the Entire Integration Object 48
Deleting a Component from the Integration Object 50
Best Practices for Maintaining Integration Objects 52
Synchronizing Integration Objects 53
Resolving Synchronization Conflicts for Integration Objects and User Properties 54
Generating Integration Object Schemas 59
Optimizing the Performance of Integration Objects 60
About Business Component Restrictions for Integration Components 61
Best Practices for Using Integration Components 62
Chapter 4: Business Services

About Business Services 65
About Creating Business Services 66
Business Service Structure 66
Property Sets 67
Creating Business Services in Siebel Tools 68
Defining a Business Service in Siebel Tools 68
Defining Business Service Methods 69
Defining Business Service Method Arguments 69
Writing Business Service Scripts 70
Defining Business Service User Properties 70
Creating Business Services in the Siebel Application 71
Deploying Business Services as Web Services 72
Exporting and Importing Business Services in Siebel Tools 73
Importing Business Services into the Siebel Application 73
Testing Your Business Service in the Simulator 73
About Accessing a Business Service Using Siebel eScript or Siebel VB 74
Business Scenario for the Use of Business Services 75
4 Integration Platform Technologies: Siebel Enterprise Application

Contents
Chapter 5: Web Services

About Web Services 79
About RPC-Literal and DOC-Literal Bindings 80
RPC-Literal Support 81
DOC-Literal Support 81
About One-Way Operations and Web Services 82
Invoking Siebel Web Services Using an External System 83
Publishing Inbound Web Services 83
Generating a WSDL File 85
About Defining the Web Service Inbound Dispatcher 85
Consuming External Web Services Using Siebel Web Services 86
Creating an Outbound Web Service Based on a WSDL File 86
Outbound Web Services Administration 88
Integration Objects as Input Arguments to Outbound Web Services 91
Web Services Support for Transport Headers 91
About the Local Business Service 92
About XML Schema Support for the <xsd:any> Tag 92
Mapping the <xsd:any> Tag in the WSDL Import Wizard 93
Mapping the <xsd:any> Tag in the XML Schema Wizard 93
Examples of Invoking Web Services 94
About Web Services Security Support 98
Configuring the Siebel Application to Use the
WS-Security Specification 99
About WS-Security UserName Token Profile Support 100
About Siebel Authentication and Session Management SOAP Headers 102
Combinations of Session Types and Authentication Types 105
Enabling Session Management on SWSE 106
Session Timeout and Max Age Parameters 106
Examples of Using SOAP Headers for Authentication and Session Management 106
About Web Services and Web Single Sign-On Authentication 109
About Passing Localization Information in SOAP Headers 109
About Custom SOAP Filters 110
Handling Custom Headers Using Filters 111
Enabling SOAP Header Processing Through Filters 111
Inputting a SOAP Envelope to a Filter Service 113
About Web Services Cache Refresh 113
Enabling Web Services Tracing 113

Contents
Chapter 6: EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service

About the EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service 117
EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service Methods 118
About the Examples in the EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service Methods Sections 118
Query Method 119
QueryPage Method 120
Synchronize Method 121
Insert Method 129
Upsert Method 130
Update Method 131
Delete Method 131
Execute Method 132
EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service Method Arguments 142
About Multivalue Groups in the EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service 145
About Using Language-Independent Code with the EAI Siebel Adapter Business
Service 147
Siebel EAI and Run-Time Events 148
Best Practices for Using the EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service 148
Troubleshooting the EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service 149
Enabling Logging for the EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service 150
Enabling Siebel Argument Tracing 151
Configuring the EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service for Concurrency Control 152
Modification Key 152
Modification IDs 153
Status IDs 156
Chapter 7: EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service

About the EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service 157
EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service Methods 158
QueryPage Method 159
UpdateLeaves Method 164
InitLeaves Method 166
InsertLeaves Method 168
DeleteLeaves Method 171
Execute Method 173
EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service Method Arguments 175
Exposing Siebel Data to External Applications 176

Contents
Chapter 8: Siebel Virtual Business Components

About Virtual Business Components 179
Using VBCs for Your Business Requirements 180
Usage and Restrictions of Virtual Business Components 181
Using Virtual Business Components 181
Creating a New Virtual Business Component 182
Setting User Properties for the Virtual Business Component 182
XML Gateway Service 183
XML Gateway Methods 185
XML Gateway Method Arguments 186
Examples of the Outgoing XML Format 186
Search-Spec Node-Type Values 191
Examples of Incoming XML Format 192
External Application Setup 195
Custom Business Service Methods 195
Common Method Parameters 196
Business Services Methods and Their Property Sets 196
Custom Business Service Example 211
Chapter 9: Siebel EAI and File Attachments

About File Attachments 219
Exchange of Attachments with External Applications 219
Using MIME Messages to Exchange Attachments 220
Creating an Integration Object 220
Creating Workflow Process Examples 222
About the EAI MIME Hierarchy Converter 226
Outbound Integration 227
Inbound Integration 228
About the EAI MIME Doc Converter 228
Chapter 10: External Business Components

Process of Configuring External Business Components 233
Creating the External Table Definition 234
Mapping External Columns to Siebel System Fields 239
Specifying the Data Source Object 240
Specifying Any Optional Table Properties 240
Configuring the External Business Component 241

Contents
Specifying Run-Time Parameters 241

Using Specialized Business Component Methods for EBCs 245
Usage and Restrictions for External Business Components 246
About Using External Business Components with the Siebel Web Clients 247
About Overriding Connection Pooling Parameters for the Data Source 247
About Joins to Tables in External Data Sources 248
About Distributed Joins 249
Configuring Distributed Joins and Federated Fields 249
Usage Guidelines and Restrictions for Distributed Joins 250
Loading an Oracle Business Intelligence Presentation Folder for Use as an External
Table 250
Troubleshooting External Business Components 251
Appendix A: Predefined EAI Business Services
Appendix B: Property Set Representation of Integration

Objects
Property Sets and Integration Objects 257
Example Instance of an Account Integration Object 260
Appendix C: DTDs for XML Gateway Business Service

Outbound DTDs for the XML Gateway Business Service 263
Inbound DTDs for the XML Gateway Business Service 265
Index

1 Whats New in This Release
Whats New in Integration Platform Technologies: Siebel Enterprise

Application Integration, Version 8.1
Table 1 lists changes described in this version of the documentation to support release 8.1 of Oracles
Siebel software.
Table 1. New Product Features in Integration Platform Technologies: Siebel Enterprise Application
Integration, Version 8.1
Topic Description
Integration Components and If an integration component is based on an intersection table,

Associations on page 20 its user keys can contain fields based on the same
intersection table only if the AllowMultipleAssociations user
property for the integration component is set to Y in Siebel
Tools.
Integration Component Keys on Removed the Foreign Key and Target Key integration
page 29 component key types, which are not used in version 8.1.
User Keys on page 30 Use the Force Case property only if you require case-
insensitive matching for performance reasons. The routine
use of the Force Case property is not recommended.
Creating Integration Objects Using Enhanced functionality includes:

the EAI Siebel Wizard Business
Deploying integration objects to the Siebel database
Service on page 40
(optional)
Choosing a naming convention for XSD container

elements
Choosing a naming convention for XML tags
Testing Integration Objects on The Import Account (File) and Export Account (File) sample
page 45 workflows no longer exist in Siebel Tools. Replaced them with
a new example.
Deploying Integration Objects to New topic. Integration objects can be deployed from Siebel
the Run-Time Database on page 46 Tools into the Siebel run-time database and modified in the
run-time environment.
Generating Integration Object The Generate XML Schema wizard can generate simple types
Schemas on page 59 for all string elements in the integration object schema.
Picklist Validation on page 61 Clarified what can happen when setting the integration
component field user property PICKLIST to N.

Whats New in This Release
Topic Description
Property Sets on page 67 It is recommended that business services treat their input
property sets as constants.
Deploying Business Services as New topic. Business services can be deployed from Siebel
Web Services on page 72 Tools as Web services. The Web services can then be
consumed by other applications.
Importing Business Services into New topic. Business services can be imported into the Siebel
the Siebel Application on page 73 run-time database as XML files and modified in the run-time
environment.
Supported Web Services Added Web Services Security (WS-Security) to the list.
Standards on page 80
Invoking Siebel Web Services Added a note that in version 8.1, you can deploy business
Using an External System on services and workflow processes as Web services and
page 83 generate WSDL files directly from Siebel Tools.
Publishing Inbound Web Services Added Oracle JDeveloper to the list of applications that you
on page 83 can use to import the Web Services Description Language
(WSDL) file into the external application.
Creating an Outbound Web Service Enhanced functionality includes:

Based on a WSDL File on page 86
Deploying integration objects to the Siebel run-time
database
Deploying proxy business services to the Siebel run-time

database
Deployment is optional.
Configuring the Siebel Application Removed the procedure for creating the SecureWebService
to Use the WS-Security profile (named subsystem) because this profile already exists
Specification on page 99 in version 8.0.
Corrected the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for

eai_anon_enu.
About Siebel Authentication and Added ServerDetermine to the table of valid session types.
Session Management SOAP
Added a note not to use Siebel Session Management and
Headers on page 102
Authentication SOAP headers in conjunction with WS-
Security SOAP headers.
About Passing Localization New topic. External applications can pass localization
Information in SOAP Headers on parameters to the Siebel Server using Web services.
page 109 Subsequent data for that user session will be returned to the
user in localized form.
About EAI File Streaming Removed topic. Siebel Business Applications, version 8.x, do
not support streaming of EAI requests and responses.

Topic Description
Enabling Web Services Tracing on Enable Business Service Argument Tracing is an advanced
page 113 component parameter. You must click Advanced in the
Component Parameters list in the Administration - Server
Configuration > Servers view to see it.
About the EAI Siebel Adapter Added a note that when called locally, the EAI Siebel Adapter
Business Service on page 117 business service creates an additional database connection.
EAI Siebel Adapter Business Added the ExecutionMode business service method argument
Service Method Arguments on for the Query and QueryPage methods. Setting
page 142 ExecutionMode to ForwardOnly can be useful for integrations
with large record sets.
Search Specification on page 163 Added the following to the list of supported operators for the
searchspec attribute of the QueryPage method of the EAI UI
Data Adapter business service:
Parentheses, including nested parentheses
EXISTS, NOT EXISTS
IS NULL, IS NOT NULL
Execute Method on page 173 Added a caution that if an operation is not specified for this
method, an implicit Synchronize operation will be performed,
deleting all unmatched child integration component
instances.
EAI UI Data Adapter Business Added the ExecutionMode business service method argument
Service Method Arguments on for the QueryPage method. Setting ExecutionMode to
page 175 ForwardOnly can be useful for integrations with large record
sets.
Exposing Siebel Data to External New topic. The Data Access Service wizard can be used to
Applications on page 176 make Siebel data available to external applications as Web
services.
Using VBCs for Your Business You can drill down from a virtual business component (VBC)
Requirements on page 180 to a standard business component, another VBC, or the same
VBC.
Inbound Workflow Process The data type for the MimeMsg process property and the
Example on page 224 MIME Message input argument is Binary.

Topic Description
About Data Type Mappings for The MS SQL Server data type bit is mapped to the Siebel data
Importing Table Definitions on type Numeric with a value of 0 or 1.
page 235
The Character Large Object (CLOB) data type is supported in
version 8.0 and higher. Added the CLOB data type to the list
of supported data types for mapping in the DB2 and Oracle
databases, and removed it from the list of unsupported data
types.
NOTE: MS SQL Server does not define a CLOB type. CLOBs

are treated as varchar(max) and nvarchar(max) objects.
Configuring the Data Source The database SQL type profile parameter is named
Definition on page 241 DSSQLStyle.
The connector Dynamic Link Library (DLL) for SQL Anywhere

in version 8.0 is sscdw9.dll.

2 Integration Objects
This chapter describes the structure of Siebel integration objects. It describes the Integration Object
Builder wizard, which assists you in building your own integration objects based on Siebel objects.
The chapter consists of the following topics:
About Integration Object Terminology on page 13
About Integration Objects on page 14
About Integration Object Base Object Types on page 15
About the Difference Between Integration Objects and Integration Object Instances on page 16
About Integration Object Wizards on page 16
About the Structure of Integration Objects on page 18
About Permission Flags for Integration Components on page 35
About EAI Siebel Adapter Access Control on page 36
About Integration Object Terminology

This chapter describes concepts that are often referred to using inconsistent terminology on different
systems. Table 2 has been included to clarify the information in this chapter by providing a standard
terminology for these concepts.
Table 2. Integration Objects Terminology
Term Description
Component A constituent part of any generic object.
Field A generic reference to a data structure that can contain one data element.
Integration message A bundle of data consisting of two major parts:
Header information that describes what should be done with or to the

message itself
Instances of integration objects; that is, data in the structure of the

integration object
Integration object An integration object of any type, including the Siebel integration object,
the SAP BAPI integration object, and the SAP IDOC integration objects.
Integration object Actual data, usually the result of a query or other operation, which is
instance passed from one business service to another, that is structurally modeled
on a Siebel integration object.

Integration Objects About Integration Objects
Table 2. Integration Objects Terminology
Term Description
Metadata Data that describes data. For example, the term data type describes data
elements such as char, int, Boolean, time, date, and float.
Siebel business A Siebel object type that defines a logical representation of columns in one
component or more database tables. A business component collects columns from the
business components base table, its extension tables, and its joined tables
into a single structure. Business components provide a layer of abstraction
over tables. Applets in Siebel applications reference business components;
they do not directly reference the underlying tables.
Siebel business object A Siebel object type that creates a logical business model using links to tie
together a set of interrelated business components. The links provide the
one-to-many relationships that govern how the business components
interrelate in this business object.
Siebel integration An object stored in the Siebel repository that represents a Siebel business
object object.
Siebel integration A constituent part of a Siebel integration object.

component
Siebel integration A data structure that can contain one data element in a Siebel integration
component field component.
About Integration Objects

Siebel integration objects allow you to represent integration metadata for Siebel business objects,
XML, SAP IDOCs, and SAP BAPIs as common structures that the EAI (Enterprise Application
Integration) infrastructure can understand. Because these integration objects adhere to a set of
structural conventions, they can be traversed and transformed programmatically, using Siebel
eScript objects, methods, and functions, or transformed declaratively using Siebel Data Mapper.
NOTE: For more information, see Business Processes and Rules: Siebel Enterprise Application
Integration.
The typical integration project involves transporting data from one application to another. For
example, you may want to synchronize data from a back-office system with the data in your Siebel
application. You may want to generate a quote in the Siebel application and perform a query against
your Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system transparently. In the context of Siebel EAI, data is
transported in the form of an integration message. A message, in this context, typically consists of
header data that identifies the message type and structure, and a body that contains one or more
instances of datafor example, orders, accounts, or employee records.
When planning your integration project, consider several issues:
How much data transformation does your message require?
At what point in the process do you perform the data transformation?
Is a confirmation message response to the sender required?

Integration Objects About Integration Object Base Object Types
Are there data items in the originating data source that should not be replicated in the receiving
data source, or that should replace existing data in the receiving data source?
This guide can help you understand how Siebel EAI represents the Siebel business object structure.
It also provides descriptions of how Siebel EAI represents external SAP R/3 structures.
About Integration Object Base Object

Types
Each integration object created in Siebel Tools has to be based on one of the base object types
presented in Table 3. This property is used by adapters to determine whether the object is a valid
object for them to process.
NOTE: XML converters can work with any of the base object types.
Table 3. Integration Object Base Object Types
Base Object Type Description
None For internal use only.
SAP BAPI Input Used to represent the input structure of an SAP RFC or BAPI function call.
For information, see Siebel Connector for SAP R/3.
SAP BAPI Output Used to represent the output structure of an SAP RFC or BAPI function call.
For information, see Siebel Connector for SAP R/3.
SAP IDOC Used with the IDOC Adapter and Receiver in version 6.x and 7.0. For
information, see Siebel Connector for SAP R/3.
SAP IDOC Adapter Used to represent an SAP IDOC structure. For information, see Siebel
Connector for SAP R/3.
SQL Used for manually creating integration objects. Only the EAI SQL Adapter
accepts integration objects of this type.
SQL Database Wizard Used by the Database Wizard for the integration object it creates. Only the
EAI SQL Adapter accepts integration objects of this type.
SQL Oracle Wizard Used by the Oracle Wizard for the integration object it creates. Only the
EAI SQL Adapter accepts integration objects of this type.
Siebel Business Used by the Integration Object Builder wizard for the integration object it
Object creates. The EAI Siebel Adapter accepts only the integration object of this
type.
Table Obsolete.
XML Used to represent external XML Schema such as DTD or XSD. For
information on DTD and XSD, see XML Reference: Siebel Enterprise
Application Integration.

Integration Objects About the Difference Between Integration Objects and Integration
Object Instances
About the Difference Between

Integration Objects and Integration
Object Instances
Understanding the difference between integration objects and integration object instances is
important, especially in regard to the way they are discussed in this chapter.
An integration object, in the context of Siebel EAI, is metadata; that is, it is a generalized
representation or model of a particular set of data. It is a schema of a particular entity.
An integration object instance is also referred to as a Siebel Message object.
An integration object instance is actual data organized in the format or structure of the integration
object. Figure 1 illustrates a simple example of an integration object and an integration object
instance, using partial data.
Figure 1. Integration Object and Integration Object Instance
Any discussion of integration objects in this book will include clarifying terms to help make the
distinction, for example, metadata or Siebel instance.
About Integration Object Wizards

Within Siebel Tools, there are multiple wizards associated with integration objects:
One that creates integration objects for internal use by the Siebel application
Others that create integration objects for external systems based on Siebel objects

Integration Objects About Integration Object Wizards
Figure 2 shows the logic of the Integration Object Builder and Generate XML Schema wizards. The
Code Generator wizard (not shown) works in the same manner as the Generate XML Schema wizard,
but it generates Java classes.
Figure 2. Integration Object Wizards
The following are the integration object wizards:
Integration Object Builder wizard. This wizard lets you create a new object. It supplies the
functionality for creating integration objects from Siebel business objects or integration objects,
based on the representations of external business objects using XML Schema Definition (XSD)
or Document Type Definition (DTD). Access this wizard from the New Object Wizards dialog box
in Siebel Tools. After selecting the EAI tab, double-click Integration Object to start the
Integration Object Builder wizard.
Generate XML Schema wizard. This wizard lets you choose an integration object and output
XML schema in XML Schema Definition (XSD) standard, Document Type Definition (DTD), or
Microsofts XDR (XML Data Reduced) format. In the Integration Objects list in Siebel Tools, select
an integration object. Then click Generate Schema to start the Generate XML Schema wizard.
Code Generator wizard. The third wizard lets you create a set of Java class files based on any
available integration object or Siebel business service. In the Integration Objects list in Siebel
Tools, select an integration object. Then click Generate Code to start the Code Generator wizard.
NOTE: Specific instructions on how to use these wizards appear throughout the Siebel Enterprise
Application Integration documentation set where appropriate.

Integration Objects About the Structure of Integration Objects
About the Structure of Integration

Objects
The Siebel integration object provides a hierarchical structure that represents a complex data type.
Most specifically, prebuilt EAI integration objects describe the structure of Siebel business objects,
SAP IDOCs, SAP BAPIs, XML, and external data. Most integration projects require the use of an
integration object that describes Siebel business objects, either in an outbound direction such as a
query operation against a Siebel integration object, or in an inbound direction such as a synchronize
operation against a Siebel integration object.
Chapter 3, Creating and Maintaining Integration Objects describes how to create integration objects.
The initial process of using the Integration Object Builder wizard is essentially the same for every
integration object type currently supported.
CAUTION: Avoid using or modifying integration objects in the EAI Design project. Using or
modifying any objects in the EAI Design project can cause unpredictable results.
Siebel business objects conform to a particular structure in memory, although it is generally not
necessary to consider this structure when working with Siebel applications. However, when you are
planning and designing an integration project, it is helpful to understand how a Siebel EAI integration
object represents that internal structure.
An integration object consists of one Parent Integration Component, sometimes referred to as the
root component, or the primary integration component. The Parent Integration Component
corresponds to the primary business component of the business object you chose as the model for
your integration object.
For example, assume you chose the Account business object (on the first panel of the Integration
Object Builder wizard) to base your integration object myAccount_01 on. The Account business
object in Siebel Tools has an Account business component as its primary business component. In the
myAccount_01 integration object, every child component will be represented as either a direct or
indirect child of the primary business component named Account.
Each child component can have one or more child components. In Siebel Tools, if you look at the
integration components for an integration object you have created, you see that each component
can have one or more fields. Figure 3 on page 19 illustrates a partial view of a Siebel integration
object based on the Account business object, with the Business Address component and the Contact
component activated.

Figure 3 represents part of the structure of the Account integration object. The Account parent
integration component can have both fields and child integration components. Each integration
component can also have child integration components and fields. A structure of this sort represents
the metadata of an Account integration object. You can choose to inactivate components and fields.
By inactivating components and fields, you can define the structure of the integration object
instances entering or leaving the system.
Figure 3. Partial Representation of Account Integration Object
The following topics are also covered in this section:
Integration Components and Associations on page 20
Multivalue Groups Within Business Components on page 21

Validation of Integration Component Fields and Picklists on page 26
Calculated Fields and Integration Objects on page 27
Inner Joins and Integration Components on page 28
Operation Controls for Integration Components on page 28
Defining Field Dependencies on page 29
Setting Primaries Through Multivalue Links on page 29
Repository Objects on page 29
Integration Component Keys on page 29
Integration Components and Associations

Siebel business objects are made up of business components that are connected by a link. An
association is a business component that represents the intersection table that contains these links.
The integration component definition of associations is similar to that of multivalue groups (MVGs).
User properties Association and MVGAssociation on the integration component denote that the
corresponding business component is an associated business component or an associated MVG,
respectively. For fields that are defined on MVG associations, External Name denotes the name of
the business component field as it appears on the parent business component, and the user property
AssocFieldName denotes the name of the business component field as it appears on the MVG
business component.

For example, the Contact business object is partly made up of the Contact and Opportunity business
components. The association between these two business components is represented by the
Contact/Opportunity link with a value or a table name in the Inter Table column. The Integration
Object Builder wizard creates a new integration component for the integration object, based on the
Contact business object that represents the association. As shown in Figure 4, the Opportunity
integration component has one user property defined: Association user property, set to a value of Y.
Figure 4. Integration Component Representation of Association
NOTE: When building an integration object, if an integration component is an association based on

an intersection table, the user key for this integration component can contain fields based on the
same intersection table only if the integration component has an AllowMultipleAssociations
integration component user property set to Y in Siebel Tools.
Multivalue Groups Within Business Components

Multivalue groups (MVGs) are used within Siebel business components to represent database
multivalue attributes. MVGs can be one of two types: regular MVGs or MVG Associations.
An integration object instance most often has multiple integration component instances. For
example, an Account can have multiple Business Addresses but only one of these addresses is
marked as the primary address. A business requirement may require that only the integration
component instance that corresponds to the primary MVG be part of the integration object instance.
In relation to Account and Business Addresses this means that only the primary address should be
part of the Account integration object instance. The primary address can be obtained by one of the
following steps:
Creating a new MVG on the Account business component that uses a link with a search
specification only returning the primary address record.

Exposing the primary address information on the Account business component level using a join
that has the primary ID as source field. Note that in this case the primary address information
corresponds to fields on the Account integration component instance and not the fields on a
separate Address component instance.
In Siebel Tools, if a Siebel business component contains an MVG, the MVG is represented in several
screens as illustrated in the following sections.
Screen 1: Fields View for an MVG Field in a Business Component

For example, as illustrated in Figure 5, the Account business component contains a multivalue field,
Address Id. The multivalue link property of Address Id has the value Business Address.
Figure 5. Address Id MVG Field in the Account Business Component

Screen 2: Multivalue Links in a Business Component

The Business Address multivalue link associated with the Address Id multivalue field in Figure 5 on
page 22 has the value Business Address as its Destination Business Component, as shown in Figure 6.
Figure 6. Destination Business Component
Screen 3: Fields View After Adding Multivalue Link

The fact that the Business Address multivalue link has Business Address as its Destination Business
Component means that there is another business component named Business Address. The Business
Address business component contains the fields that are collectively represented by Address Id in
the Account business component, as shown in Figure 7.
Figure 7. Business Address Business Component

Graphical Representation of a Business Component and a Multivalue

Link
Figure 8 shows a graphical way to represent the relationship between Account business component
and the Business Address multivalue link.
Figure 8. Address Id Field and Business Address Multivalue Link
The more table-like representation in Figure 8 shows how the Business Address multivalue link
connects the two business components. The child points to the Business Address business
component, which contains the multiple fields that make up the MVG.
NOTE: Two business components are used to represent an MVG.
Creating a Siebel Integration Component to Represent an MVG

To create a Siebel integration component to represent an MVG, it is necessary also to create two
integration components:
The first integration component represents the parent business component. In the example, this
is the Account business component. This integration component contains only the fields that are
defined in the parent business component, but which are not based on MVGs. The Multivalue Link
property and the Multivalue property are empty for these fields.

The second integration component represents the MVG business component. In the example, this
is the Business Address business component. The second integration component has one
integration field for each field based on the given MVG in the parent business component. An
integration component user property will be set on this integration component to tell the EAI
Siebel Adapter that it is based on an MVG business component. If the MVG is a regular MVG, the
user property is named MVG. If the MVG is an Association MVG, then the user property is named
MVGAssociation. In both cases, the value of the user property is Y.
Figure 9 shows an integration component based on an MVG and its user property value in Siebel
Tools.
Figure 9. Integration Component Based on MVG Business Component

The EAI Siebel Adapter business service needs to know the names of the MVG fields as they are
defined in the parent business componentin this example, Accountand also the names of the MVG
fields as they are known in the business component that represents the MVGin this example,
Account Business Address. As shown in Figure 10, the integration component fields represent the
MVG.
Figure 10. Integration Component Fields Representing MVG
To represent both names, each field is assigned an integration component field user property that
contains the entry MVGFieldName or AssocFieldName if the user property is MVGAssoc. Its value is
the name of the field shown in the parent business componentin this example, Business Address.
Validation of Integration Component Fields and Picklists

If an integration component field is created for a Siebel business component field, and the business
component field is based on a picklist, the EAI Siebel Adapter or the Object Manager validates the
field. To have the validation done using the EAI Siebel Adapter, the integration component field has
a user property with the name PICKLIST and a value of Y; otherwise, validation is done by the Object
Manager.
If the EAI Siebel Adapter validates the integration component field, and if the pickmap for the picklist
contains more than one field, when designing the integration object, you must decide the following:
Which of the fields to use as a search criterion.
Which fields to simply update if input values are different from those in the picklist (provided that
the picklist allows updates).

Example of an Integration Object Based on the Order Entry Business

Object
An example is an integration object based on Order Entry business object. The root component of
the Order Entry business object is Order Entry - Orders with a field Account, whose pickmap contains
a large number of fields such as Account, Account Location, Account Integration Id, Currency Code,
Price List, and so on. One of the tasks the integration object designer needs to perform is to
determine which of these fields is used to identify the account for an order.
If the PicklistUserKeys user property on the integration component field that is mapped to the field
with the picklist (in the example above: Account) is not defined, then any integration component
fields that are mapped to columns in the U1 index of business component's base table, and are
present in the pickmap will be used by the EAI Siebel Adapter to find the matching record in the
picklist. (In the example above, this would be Account and Account Location.)
In cases where the default user key for the picklist does not satisfy your business requirements (for
example, Account Integration Id should be solely used instead of the default user key to pick an
Account), or you want to make the user key explicit for performance reasons, then use the
PicklistUserKeys user property.
The value of the PicklistUserKeys user property is a comma separated list of integration component
fields that are used to find the matching record in the picklist (for example, 'Account, Account
Location' or 'Account Integration Id').
In order for the EAI Siebel Adapter to use the fields referenced in PicklistUserKeys user property, the
fields must be included in the pickmap of the underlying business component field. Please note that
if the business component field names and integration component field names, listed in the
PicklistUserKeys property, are not the same, then the picklist must contain external names of the
fields listed in the PicklistUserKeys user property.
If there is a field present in the business component and in the pickmap, and it is stored in the base
table, then the EAI Siebel Adapter can use the picklist to populate this field, only if this field is
present and active in the integration component. This field must also be present and empty in the
input property set.
Calculated Fields and Integration Objects

Calculated fields are inactive in the integration object when they are created. If your business needs
require it, activate the calculated fields in the integration object.
NOTE: Calculated fields are those integration component fields that have the Calculated flag checked
on the corresponding business component field.

Inner Joins and Integration Components

When inner joins are used, records for which the inner joined field is not set are not returned in any
query. By default the wizard inactivates such fields. If your business needs require these fields,
activate them.
NOTE: If the inner join has a join specification that is based on a required field, then the wizard does
not inactivate the fields that are using that particular join.
For example, assume that Account business component has an inner join to the S_PROJ table, with
Project Id field being the source field in the join specification, and the Project Name field being based
on that join.
If an integration component, with an active Project Name field is mapped to the Account business
component, then when this integration component is queried only accounts with Project Id field
populated will be considered.
Because Project Id is not a required field in the Account business component, not every account in
the Siebel Database is associated with a project. So, having Project Name active in the integration
component limits the scope of the integration component to only accounts associated with a project.
This typically is not desirable, so the wizard inactivates the Project Name field in this example.
If the business requirement is to include the Project Name field, but not to limit the integration
components scope to only accounts with the project, then you can change the join to S_PROJ in the
Account business component to an outer join. For information on joins, see Using Siebel Tools.
NOTE: Activating an inner join can cause a query on that integration component not to find existing
rows.
Operation Controls for Integration Components

Each integration component has user properties that indicate if an Insert, Update, or Delete can be
performed on the corresponding business component, indicated by a NoInsert, NoUpdate, or
NoDelete. A similar user property NoUpdate may be set on an integration component field. If any of
these user properties are set to Y, the corresponding business component method is used to validate
the operation.
The user properties NoQuery and NoSynchronize are defined on integration components to specify
to the EAI Siebel Adapter if a corresponding operation is to be performed on an instance of that type.
These properties take values Y or N.
The user property AdminMode set to Y indicates that the update of the corresponding business
component is to be performed in admin mode. You can define this property in either the integration
object or integration component definitions.
The user properties IgnorePermissionErrorsOnUpdate, IgnorePermissionErrorsOnInsert, and

IgnorePermissionErrorsOnDelete can be used to suppress the errors that arise from having the
NoUpdate, NoInsert, and NoDelete user properties set to Y, respectively. The error is ignored and
processing continues.

Defining Field Dependencies

Define dependency between fields by using the user properties of the integration component field.
The names of these user properties must start with FieldDependency, and the value of each property
should contain the name of the field that the associated field is dependent on. The EAI Siebel Adapter
processes fields in the order defined by these dependencies, and generates an error if cyclic
dependencies exist.
The EAI Siebel Adapter automatically takes into account the dependencies of the fields set by a
PickList on the fields used as constraints in that PickList. For example, if a PickList on field A also
sets field B, and is constrained by field C, then this implies dependencies of both A and B on C. As a
consequence, the EAI Siebel Adapter sets field C before fields A and B.
Setting Primaries Through Multivalue Links

Primaries are set through multivalue links. However, do not use multivalue links for modifying the
linked component. To modify the linked component, use links. If you need to set primaries in addition
to modifying the linked component, use both links and multivalue links in your integration object. It
is recommended that the EAI Siebel Adapter use the multivalue link only after it processes the
component through the link; therefore, the link or the Association component has a smaller external
sequence number than the related MVG or MVGAssociation component. See About the Structure of
Integration Objects on page 18 for an example.
Repository Objects
For the EAI Siebel Adapter to deal with repository objects, a user property REPOBJ must be defined
on the root integration component. If this property is set to Y, the EAI Siebel Adapter sets a context
on the repository so that the rest of the operations are performed in that context.
Integration Component Keys

There are multiple types of integration component keys:
User Key. See User Keys on page 30.
Status Key. See Status Keys on page 34.
Hierarchy Parent Key. See Using the Hierarchy Parent Key on page 35.
Hierarchy Root Key. See Using the Hierarchy Root Key on page 35.
Modification Key. See Configuring the EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service for Concurrency
Control on page 152.
NOTE: There should be just one integration component key for every type of key except the user
key. For example, if there are two Hierarchy Parent Keys defined for an integration component, the
EAI Siebel Adapter picks the first one and ignores the second one.

User Keys
User key is a group of fields whose values must uniquely identify a Siebel business component
record. During inbound integration, user keys are used to determine whether the incoming data
updates an existing record or inserts a new one. The Integration Object Builder wizard automatically
creates some user keys based on characteristics discussed in User Key Generation Algorithm on
page 31. Make sure that the generated user keys match your business requirements; otherwise,
inactivate them or add new user keys as appropriate.
Integration component keys are built by the Integration Object Builder wizard, based on values in
the underlying table of the business component that the integration component is based on.
Integration objects that represent Siebel business objects, and that are used in insert, update,
synchronize, or execute operations, must have at least one user key defined for each integration
component.
In Siebel Tools, user keys are defined as Integration Component Key objects, with the Key Type
property set to User Key.
A sequence of integration component user keys is defined on each integration component definition,
each of which contains a set of fields. During processing of integration component instance, the EAI
Siebel Adapter chooses to use the first user key in the sequence that satisfies the condition that all
the fields of that user key are present in an integration component instance. The first instance of
each integration component type determines the user key used by all instances of that type.
For example, consider the Account integration object instance with only Account Name and Account
Integration Id field present. When the EAI Siebel Adapter performs validation, it first checks the
Account Name and Account Location field (the first user key for the Account integration component).
In this example, because the Account Location field is missing, the EAI Siebel Adapter moves to the
second user keyAccount Integration Id. The Account Integration Id field is present in the
integration component instance and has a value, so the EAI Siebel Adapter uses that as the user key
to match the record. Now if the same instance also had Account Location field present, but set to
null, then the EAI Siebel Adapter picks the Account Name and Account Location combination as the
user key. This is because Account Location is not a required field.
A new user key is picked for each integration object instance (root component instance). However,
for the child component instances, the user key is picked based on the first child instance, and then
used for matching all instances of that integration component within the parent integration
component instance.
For example, if a Siebel Message contains two orders, then the user key for order items is picked
twice, once for each order. Each time, the user key is selected based on the first order item record
and then used for all the siblings.
NOTE: The EAI Siebel Adapter uses user keys to match integration component instances with
business component records. Because the match is case sensitive there is a chance that records are
not matched if the cases of the user key fields do not match. You can use the Force Case property
on the business component field to make sure that user key fields are always stored in one case, but
only if you require case-insensitive matching for performance reasons. Routine use of the Force Case
property is not recommended.

User Key Generation Algorithm

The Integration Object Builder wizard computes the user keys by traversing several Siebel objects,
including the business object, business component, table, and link. This is because not every table
user key meets the requirements to be used as the basis for integration object user keys.
To understand how the Integration Object Builder wizard determines valid integration component
keys, you can simulate the process of validating the user keys. For example, determine the table on
which your business component is based. In Siebel Tools, you can look up this information yourself.
To find the user keys for a table

1 Select the Business Component object in the Object Explorer.
The Business Components list appears in the Object List Editor.
2 Select a business component.
3 Click the link in the Table column.
The Tables list appears, displaying the table associated with the business component (for
example S_CONTACT).
4 Expand the Tables object in the Object Explorer, and then select User Key.
The User Keys list displays the user keys defined for that table.
For example, as shown in Figure 11, the table S_CONTACT has several user keys.
Figure 11. User Keys for Table S_CONTACT
Not every user key will necessarily be valid for a given business component. Multiple business
components can map to the same underlying table; therefore, it is possible that a tables user key
is not valid for a particular business component, but is specific to another business component

Each User Key Column child object defined for a given user key must be exposed to the business
component in which you are interested. For example, Figure 12 shows three user key columns for
the user key S_CONTACT_U1.
Figure 12. User Key Columns for the S_CONTACT_U1 User Key
If the columns of the user key are exposed in the business component, and those columns are not
foreign keys, the Integration Object Builder wizard creates an integration component key based on
the tables user key. The Integration Object Builder wizard also defines one integration component
key field corresponding to each of the tables user key columns.

The Integration Object Builder wizard builds the integration component keys based on these table
user keys. As illustrated in Figure 13, the wizard defines one integration component key for each
table user key column.
Figure 13. Integration Component Keys for Each Table User Key Column

Each valid integration component key contains fields. For example, as shown in Figure 14, for the
Contact integration component, User Key 3 is made up of five fields: CSN, First Name, Last Name,
Middle Name, and Personal Contact.
CAUTION: Only modify user keys if you have a good understanding of the business component and
integration logic.
Figure 14. Contact Integration Component Key Fields
When the Integration Object Builder wizard creates these integration component keys, it attempts
to use the appropriate table user keys the user keys that help to uniquely identify a given record.
In some cases, you may find that certain integration component keys created by the Integration
Object Builder wizard are not useful for your particular needs. In that case, you can manually
inactivate the keys you do not want to use by checking the Inactive flag on that particular user key
in Siebel Tools. You can also inactivate user key fields within a given user key.
NOTE: For ease of maintenance and upgrade, inactivate unnecessary generated user keys and user
key fields instead of deleting them.
Status Keys
In the context of Siebel business objects, user keys are a group of fields whose values must uniquely
identify only one Siebel business component record. Integration components within a corresponding
integration object also contain user keys.
For many integrations, you want to know the status. For example, if you are sending an order request
you want to know the ID of the Order created so that you can query on the order in the future. You
can set the Status Object of the EAI Siebel Adapter to True to return an integration object instance
as a status object.

Integration Objects About Permission Flags for Integration Components
The status returned is defined in the Integration Component using Status Keys. A Status Key is an
Integration Component key of the type Status Key. Fields defined as part of the Status Key are
included in the returned Status Object. If a Status Key is not defined for the Integration Component
then neither the component nor any of its children are included in the returned object:
To include descendants of an Integration Component without including any of its fields in the
returned status object, specify an empty Status Key.
To include information about which one of the update, insert, or delete operations was performed
during an upsert request or synchronize request, include a field named Operation in the Status
Key.
Using the Hierarchy Parent Key

The Hierarchy Parent Key is used for integration objects that have a homogeneous hierarchy. This
key should only have the Parent Id. The Hierarchy Parent Key is used for maintaining the hierarchy
and keeping the data normalized.
For example, when you insert quotes, each quote item in turn can have more quote items. In this
case, the first quote item inserted by the EAI Siebel Adapter has the Parent Id set to blank, but for
each child quote item, the EAI Siebel Adapter checks the keys to figure out which fields are to be
set. If the Hierarchy Parent Key is not defined, then the child quote item is inserted as a new quote
item without a link to its parent (denormalized).
Using the Hierarchy Root Key

The Hierarchy Root Key is an optional key that is useful only when integration objects have a
homogeneous hierarchy. You can use this key to improve performance. The Hierarchy Root Key must
have only one field, Root Id, which the EAI Siebel Adapter populates with the value of the ID field in
the component instance that is in the root of the homogenous hierarchy. For example, assume quote
Q1 has quote items A, B, and C where each of the quote items has child quote items (A1, A2, B1,
B2, ...). If you want to update the quantity requested for all quote items starting with the root quote
item B, then it is faster if the data is denormalized. Using the Hierarchy Root Key, you can search for
all records with Root Id equal to the Row Id of B, and set the QuantityRequested field for each item.
NOTE: When the business component is hierarchy enabled, then the wizard automatically sets the
Hierarchy Parent Key for the complex integration component. To have a business component
hierarchy enabled you must set the property Hierarchy Parent Field.
About Permission Flags for Integration

Components
Each business component, link, MVG, and integration object user property has settings such as No
Update, No Delete, and No Insert. These settings indicate the type of operations that cannot be
performed on that object. In order for the EAI Siebel Adapter to successfully perform an operation,
that operation must be allowed at all levels. If the operation is allowed at every level except the field
level, a warning message is logged in the log file and processing continues. Otherwise, an error
message is returned, and the transaction is rolled back. You set the permission settings by using user
properties on the integration object, component, or field.

Integration Objects About EAI Siebel Adapter Access Control
Table 4 illustrates which permissions influence which operation type on an integration component.
Table 4. Permission Flags for an Integration Component
Integration Component Type
Permission Layer Checked by... Standard MVG Association
Integration Object Component EAI Siebel

Adapter
Integration Component
Integration Field (Update Only)
Link Object Manager
Multivalue Link (MVL)
Business Component
(Overridden by AdminMode)
Business Component Field
NOTE: The transaction is rolled back if any of the permissions (excluding field-level permissions) are
denied.
About EAI Siebel Adapter Access Control

You can use the following mechanisms to control EAI Siebel Adapter access to the database:
Restricted access to a static set of integration objects. You can configure the EAI Siebel
Adapter business service, or any business service that is based on the
CSEEAISiebelAdapterService class, to restrict access to a static set of integration objects. To do
this, set a business service user property called AllowedIntObjects, which contains a comma-
separated list of integration object names that this configuration of the EAI Siebel Adapter can
use. This allows you to minimize the number of integration objects your users need to expose
outside of Siebel applications through HTTP inbound or MQSeries Receiver server components. If
this user property is not specified, the EAI Siebel Adapter uses any integration objects defined
in the current Siebel Repository.
ViewMode. You can specify the visibility mode of business components that the EAI Siebel
Adapter uses. This mode is specified as the integration object user property ViewMode. This user
property can take different values, as defined by LOV type REPOSITORY_BC_VIEWMODE_TYPE.
NOTE: For information on ViewMode, see Siebel Tools Online Help.

3 Creating and Maintaining

Integration Objects
This chapter describes how to use the Integration Object Builder wizard in Siebel Tools to create new
Siebel integration objects. This wizard guides you through the process of selecting objects (either
from the Siebel repository or from an external system) on which you can base your new Siebel
integration object. This chapter also describes how to fine-tune and refine the integration object you
have created.
The chapter consists of the following topics:
About the Integration Object Builder on page 37
About the EAI Siebel Wizard Business Service on page 38
Creating Integration Objects Using the EAI Siebel Wizard Business Service on page 40
Creating an Integration Object Based on Another Root Business Component on page 43
Creating an Integration Object with Many-To-Many Relationships on page 44
Configuring Integration Objects on page 45
Validating Integration Objects on page 45
Testing Integration Objects on page 45
Deploying Integration Objects to the Run-Time Database on page 46
About Synchronizing Integration Objects on page 47
Synchronizing Integration Objects on page 53
Resolving Synchronization Conflicts for Integration Objects and User Properties on page 54
Generating Integration Object Schemas on page 59
Optimizing the Performance of Integration Objects on page 60
About Business Component Restrictions for Integration Components on page 61
Best Practices for Using Integration Components on page 62
About the Integration Object Builder

The Integration Object Builder wizard in Siebel Tools builds a list of valid components from which you
can choose the components to include in your Siebel integration object.
NOTE: The Integration Object Builder provides a partial rendering of your data in the integration
object format. You must review the integration object definition and complete the definition of your
requirements. In particular, confirm that the user key definitions are defined properly. You may need
to enter keys and user properties manually or inactivate unused keys and fields in Siebel Tools. Do
not expect to use the integration object without modification.

Creating and Maintaining Integration Objects About the EAI Siebel Wizard Business
Service
Perform the following tasks when creating an integration object:
Creating Integration Objects Using the EAI Siebel Wizard Business Service on page 40
Configuring Integration Objects on page 45
Validating Integration Objects on page 45
Compiling your changes into the SRF file
Testing Integration Objects on page 45
About the EAI Siebel Wizard Business

Service
You can use the Integration Object Builder to create integration objects that represent Siebel
business objects. During the process of creating a new integration object, described in Creating
Integration Objects Using the EAI Siebel Wizard Business Service on page 40, you can choose the EAI
Siebel Wizard as the business service to help create the object. This wizard understands the structure
of Siebel business objects. It returns a list of the available business objects on which you can choose
to base your integration object.

Creating and Maintaining Integration Objects About the EAI Siebel Wizard Business
Service
The wizard also returns a list of the available components contained within the object you have
chosen, shown in Figure 15. When you select certain components in the wizard, you are activating
those components in your integration object. Your integration object contains the entire structural
definition of the business object you selected in the first wizard dialog box. Only the components you
checked, or left selected, are active within your integration object. That means any instances you
retrieve of that integration object contains only data represented by the selected components.
Figure 15. Activated Components in the Contact Integration Object

Creating and Maintaining Integration Objects Creating Integration Objects Using the
EAI Siebel Wizard Business Service
After the wizard creates your integration object, you can edit the object in Siebel Tools, as shown in
Figure 16. You might choose to drill down into the integration components and activate or inactivate
particular components or even particular fields within one or more components.
NOTE: Always inactivate the fields rather than delete them. When you execute the synchronization
task, using the Integration Object Synchronize wizard in Siebel Tools, inactivated fields remain
inactive, while the deleted fields are created as active fields in the integration object.
Figure 16. Integration Component Fields in the Contact Integration Object
Creating Integration Objects Using the

Siebel Tools provides the EAI Siebel Wizard business service to walk you through creating an
integration object. Use this wizard to create your integration object.
You can also use the wizard to deploy integration objects to the run-time database.
NOTE: If you deploy integration objects while the Siebel Server is running, you must subsequently
clear the Web services cache in the Administration - Web Services > Inbound (or Outbound) Web
Services view.
To create a new Siebel integration object

1 In Siebel Tools, create a new project and lock it, or lock an existing project in which you want to
create your integration object.
2 Choose File > New Object... to display the New Object Wizards dialog box.

3 Select the EAI tab, and then double-click Integration Object.
The Integration Object Builder wizard appears.
4 In the Integration Object Builder wizard:
a Select the project you locked in Step 1.
b Select the EAI Siebel Wizard business service.
5 Click Next.
The second page of the Integration Object Builder wizard appears.
a Select the source object. This is the object model for the new Siebel integration object. Only
business objects with Primary Business Components appear on this picklist.

b Type a unique name in the field for the new Siebel integration object and click Next.
NOTE: The name of an integration object must be unique among other integration objects.
There will be an error if the name already exists.
The next page of the wizard, the Integration Object Builder - Choose Integration Components
page, displays the available components of the object you chose.
6 Deselect the components you want the wizard to ignore. This means you cannot integrate data
for that component between the Siebel application and another system.
NOTE: Any component that has a plus sign (+) next to it is a parent in a parent-child relationship
with one or more child components. If you deselect the parent component, the children below
that component are deselected as well. You cannot include a child component without also
including the parent. The Integration Object Builder enforces this rule by automatically selecting
the parent of any child you choose to include.
For example, assume you have chosen to build your Siebel integration object on the Siebel
Account business object, and you want to create an integration component based on the Account
and Contact business components:
a Deselect the Account integration component at the top of the scrolling list. This action deselects
the entire tree below Account.
b Select the Contact component. When selecting a child component, its parent component is also
selected, but none of the components below the child component are selected. You must
individually select the ones you want.
7 From the Container Naming Convention drop-down menu, choose either List Of Prefix or
Suffix s.
This allows flexibility when generating XML Schema Definition (XSD) files from integration
objects. For example, rather than generating container elements such as xsd:ListOfContact, you
can choose to have elements generated called xsd:Contacts.

Creating and Maintaining Integration Objects Creating an Integration Object Based
on Another Root Business Component
8 Select the Lower CamelCase for XML Tags checkbox to use this convention for naming XML tags.
CamelCase is a naming convention in which a name is formed of multiple words that are joined
together as a single word, with the first letter of each of the multiple words capitalized so that
each word that makes up the name can easily be read. The name derives from the hump or
humps that seem to appear in any Camel Case name. In Lower CamelCase, the first letter of the
name is lowercase, for example myNewIntegrationObject.
The default convention is Upper CamelCase, for example MyNewIntegrationObject.
9 Click Next. The next page displays error or warning messages generated during the process.
Review the messages, and take the appropriate actions to address them.
10 (Optional) Select the Deploy the Integration Object checkbox to deploy the integration object to
the run-time database.
For more information, see Deploying Integration Objects to the Run-Time Database on page 46.
11 Click Finish.
Your new Siebel integration object appears in the list of integration objects in Siebel Tools.
On the Integration Components screen, the Account integration component is the only
component that has a blank field in the Parent Integration Component column. The blank field
identifies Account as the root component. The Siebel integration object also contains the other
components selected, such as Contact and its child components.
NOTE: When you create your integration object based on a Siebel business object, do not change
its integration components External Name Context; otherwise, the synchronization process will
not recognize the integration component, and will remove it from the integration object.
12 To view the fields that make up each integration component, select a component from the
integration component list in Siebel Tools.
The Integration Component Fields list displays the list of fields for that component. Note the
system fields Conflict Id, Created, Id, Mod Id, Updated, operation, and searchspec in the list.
This setting prevents the EAI Siebel Adapter Query and QueryPage method from outputting these
fields. For more details, see About Using Language-Independent Code with the EAI Siebel Adapter
Business Service on page 147.
13 When finished, compile the locked project.
Creating an Integration Object Based on

Another Root Business Component
The Integration Object Builder wizard, using the EAI Siebel Wizard, allows you to choose which
business object to use. However, the Integration Object Builder wizard will generate the Primary
Business Component as the root Integration Component. If it happens that the business object
contains multiple root business components (note the difference between root and primary business
component), and that the user requires the Integration Object to be created based on another root
business component, then you perform the following procedure.

Creating and Maintaining Integration Objects Creating an Integration Object with
Many-To-Many Relationships
To create an integration object based on another root business component

1 In Siebel Tools, lock the project containing the business object you want to modify.
2 Modify the business object definition to have that particular root business component as the
Primary Business Component.
3 Run the Integration Object Builder wizard and choose the business object you want to use.
4 Undo the changes to the business object definition that you made in Step 2.
NOTE: This is necessary because unless you are certain about what you are doing in terms of
changing the Primary Business Component of the business object, it is recommended that you
roll back the changes so that they do not affect any business logic.
5 Compile the locked project.
Creating an Integration Object with

Many-To-Many Relationships
The following is an example of how to create an integration object with two components that have a
many-to-many (M:M) relationship. In this example, an integration object uses the Contact business
object and the Contact and Opportunity business components.
To create an integration object with a many-to-many business component

2 Choose File > New Object to display the New Object Wizards dialog box.
3 Select the EAI tab, and then double-click the Integration Object icon.
4 In the Integration Object Builder wizard:

a Select the project you locked in Step 1.
b Select the EAI Siebel Wizard business service.
5 Click Next and in the second page of the Integration Object Builder wizard:
a Select the source object Contact to be the base for the new Siebel integration object.
b Type a unique name in the field for the new Siebel integration object, for example Sample
Contact M:M, and then click Next.
c Select the source root for the new integration object from the list.
6 From the list of components, select Contact and Opportunity.
NOTE: There is also a component named Contact_Opportunity in the list. This component is an
MVGAssociation component, and you pick it only if you need this integration object to set the
primary opportunity for contact. For information on multivalue groups, see About Multivalue
Groups in the EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service on page 145.

Creating and Maintaining Integration Objects Configuring Integration Objects
7 Inactivate all integration component fields in the Contact integration component except First
Name, Last Name, Login Name, and Comment. (In this example, these are the only fields you
need for Contact.)
8 Inactivate all integration component fields in the Opportunity integration component except
Account, Account Location, Budget Amt, Name, and Description. (In this example, these are the
only fields you need for Opportunity.)
9 Compile the locked project.
Configuring Integration Objects

After you create your integration object you must configure it based on your business requirements.
The following is a list of best practices in configuring an integration object:
In Siebel Tools, inactivate the fields that do not apply to your business requirements.
If necessary, activate the fields that have been inactivated by the Siebel Wizard. For information,
see Chapter 2, Integration Objects.
Add the fields that have not been included by the Siebel Wizard. For information on the
implications of activating such fields, see Calculated Fields and Integration Objects on page 27
and Inner Joins and Integration Components on page 28.
Validate the user keys. For information, see Chapter 2, Integration Objects.
Update the user properties for your integration object to reflect your business requirements. For
information, see Resolving Synchronization Conflicts for Integration Objects and User Properties
on page 54.
Validating Integration Objects

When you have created your integration object and made the necessary modifications to meet your
business requirements, you must validate it.
To validate your integration object

1 In Siebel Tools, select your integration object.
2 Right-click the integration object and select Validate.
3 Review the report, and modify your integration object as needed.
NOTE: After validation, the integration objects you create in Siebel Tools must be compiled into the
SRF file.
Testing Integration Objects

After validating and compiling integration objects, test them using the Workflow Process Simulator.

Creating and Maintaining Integration Objects Deploying Integration Objects to the
Run-Time Database
For information on creating, modifying, and simulating workflow processes, see Siebel Business
Process Framework: Workflow Guide.
To test a newly created integration object

1 In Siebel Tools, select Workflow Process in the Object Explorer.
2 Create a new workflow process invoking the EAI Siebel Adapter business service against the new
integration object.
For example, create a workflow process to query with the new integration object and write the
output message to an XML file, as in the following:
3 Run the workflow process using the Workflow Process Simulator.
Deploying Integration Objects to the

Run-Time Database
You can deploy integration objects, which you have created in Siebel Tools, to the Siebel run-time
database. Siebel object manager processes build a cache of the deployed integration objects to
improve performance. These deployed integration objects are read from the cache at run time.
This saves time by allowing you to modify integration object definitions without having to shut down
your production environment, edit integration objects in Siebel Tools, and recompile the SRF.
In version 8.1, integration objects are read first from the cache and then from the repository. A list
of deployed integration objects is maintained in the repository so that performance is not slowed by
rereading these integration objects.
Deploying an Integration Object to the Run-Time Database

The following procedure is used to deploy integration objects that have already been created in
Siebel Tools. To deploy an integration object while creating it with the Integration Object Builder
wizard, see Creating Integration Objects Using the EAI Siebel Wizard Business Service on page 40.
To deploy an integration object to the run-time database

1 In the Object Explorer in Siebel Tools, select Integration Object.
The Integration Objects list appears.
2 Right-click the integration object to deploy, and then choose Deploy to Runtime Database.
The integration object is deployed.

Creating and Maintaining Integration Objects About Synchronizing Integration
Objects
3 In the Siebel client, navigate to Administration- Web Services > Inbound (or Outbound) Web
Services.
4 Click Clear Cache.
Deployed integration objects are shown in the Administration - Web Services > Deployed Integration
Objects view in the Siebel client.
Removing an Integration Object From the Run-Time Database

You can also remove deployed integration objects.
To remove a deployed integration object from the run-time database

1 In the Object Explorer in Siebel Tools, select Integration Object.
The Integration Objects list appears.
2 Right-click the integration object to remove, and then choose Undeploy.
The integration object is removed from the run-time database.
3 In the Siebel client, navigate to Administration- Web Services > Inbound (or Outbound) Web
Services.
4 Click Clear Cache.
About Synchronizing Integration

Objects
Business objects often require updates to their definitions to account for changes in data type,
length, edit format, or other properties. It is common to want to alter database metadata, but if you
do so you have to also update your integration objects to account for these updates. Otherwise, you
can cause undesirable effects on your integration projects.
Some examples of these changes are:
A field removed
A new required field
A new picklist for a field
A change of relationship from one-to-many to many-to-many
An upgrade to a new version of Siebel applications
To help simplify the synchronization task, Siebel EAI provides the Integration Object Synchronize
wizard. Although the process of synchronizing your integration object with its underlying business
object is straightforward, review the integration objects you have modified to make sure that you
have not inadvertently altered them by performing a synchronization. After synchronization, validate
your integration object.

Objects
Synchronization Rules on page 48
Updating the Entire Integration Object on page 48
Deleting a Component from the Integration Object on page 50
Best Practices for Maintaining Integration Objects on page 52
Synchronization Rules
During the synchronization process, the wizard follows particular update rules. Consider a simple
example involving the Siebel Account integration object with only Contact and its child components
marked as active in the object. Figure 17 helps you to visualize this example.
Figure 17. Example of Selected Integration Components
Because the Account component is the parent of Contact, it is also selected, even though you cannot
see it in Figure 17.
Updating the Entire Integration Object

Either the business object or the integration object might have changed since the integration object
was first created. The Synchronization wizard creates a new object that takes into account any
business object and integration object changes.

Objects
Figure 18 illustrates how the Synchronization wizard takes into account any changes.
Figure 18. Synchronizing the Integration Object

Objects
Figure 19 shows how the resulting integration object is structured after the synchronization.
Figure 19. Completely Updated Integration Object
The integration object now contains two new components, Business Address and Opportunity. Other
components are updated with the definitions of the corresponding components in the business
object.
Deleting a Component from the Integration Object

If you choose to deselect a component in the Synchronization wizard, you specify to the wizard to
delete the component in the integration object with the matching External Name Context property.
The integration object that exists in the database has a component with the same External Name,
External Name Sequence, and External Name Context as the unchecked component in the
component selection tree.
In Figure 20 on page 51, the Contact_Personal Address in the existing Account integration object is
unchecked in the Synchronization wizard tree. This is represented by an X in this figure.

Objects
Figure 20 illustrates this concept.
Figure 20. Deleting a Component from the Integration Object

Objects
Figure 21 shows the integration object after synchronization.
Figure 21. Synchronization Resulting in a Deleted Component
The component Contact_Personal Address has been deleted. When you use the updated integration
object, you cannot pass data for that component between a Siebel application and an external
application.
This example shows you how you might cause unexpected results by deselecting components.
However, if you do want to delete a particular component from the integration object, deleting a
component from the integration object method accomplishes that goal.
Best Practices for Maintaining Integration Objects

As the examples illustrate, you must be aware of the possible changes that can occur when you
synchronize business objects and integration objects. The Integration Objects Synchronize wizard
can provide assistance in managing your integration objects, but you must have a clear
understanding of your requirements, your data model, and the Siebel business object structure
before undertaking a task as important as synchronization.
To make maintenance of integration objects easier, adhere to the following guidelines when creating
or editing your integration objects:
Use a meaningful name for any user key you have added that is different from the generated
user keys. Using meaningful names helps with debugging.

Creating and Maintaining Integration Objects Synchronizing Integration Objects
Inactivate user keys instead of deleting them.
Inactivate fields instead of deleting them.
Synchronizing Integration Objects

You use the Integration Object Synchronize wizard in Siebel Tools to update and synchronize
integration objects.
NOTE: The update process overrides the integration object and deletes user keys, user properties,
and so on. You can use the copy of the integration object made by the Synchronization wizard to see
how you have modified the object.
To update an integration object with updated business object definitions

1 In Siebel Tools, select the integration object you want to update.
2 Click Synchronize in the Integration Objects list.
The Integration Object Synchronize wizard appears.
3 Click on the plus sign to list all the related integration components, as shown in the following
figure.
The process of retrieving Siebel integration objects and Siebel business object definitions can
take varying amounts of time, depending on the size of the selected objects.

Creating and Maintaining Integration Objects Resolving Synchronization Conflicts for
Integration Objects and User Properties
4 Uncheck the boxes beside the objects and components you do not want to include in the
synchronization of your Siebel integration object. Note that only the objects that are included in
the new integration object are marked.
5 Choose to add new fields as active or inactive and click Next. Inactive is the default.
The process of performing the synchronization can take some time, depending on the complexity
of the selected objects.
The Integration Object Synchronize Summary screen appears, providing feedback from the
synchronization.
Each added field is checked as to whether or not it is required for use with the integration object.
6 Review the summary. If changes are needed, click Back and make the needed changes.
7 If no changes are needed, click Finish to synchronize the Siebel integration object and the Siebel
business object.
The Compare Objects dialog box appears. This tool allows you to move properties and objects
between versions using arrow buttons.
When you synchronize the Siebel integration object and the Siebel business object, the
Synchronization wizard performs update, insert, and delete operations on the existing integration
object definition. The Synchronization wizard selects or deselects components to make the Siebel
integration object look like the definition of the Siebel business object you chose.
The wizard generally updates the Siebel integration object either by updating the object and its
components or by updating some components and deleting others. For information, see
Updating the Entire Integration Object on page 48 and Deleting a Component from the
Integration Object on page 50.
8 Copy custom properties and custom user keys as needed. The wizard includes any new fields
added to the business object in your integration object for the new version of your Siebel
application. All these fields are set to active.
9 Inactivate any new fields that you do not need in a component of your updated integration object.
10 Right-click on your integration object, and select the Validate option to validate your integration
object.
NOTE: If you want to synchronize any of the external integration objects, follow this general
procedure to perform a synchronization operation.
Resolving Synchronization Conflicts for

This section serves as a guide to resolving synchronization conflicts should any arise.

Table 5 illustrates the behavior of the merging logic for each of the integration object parts that have
to be synchronized.
Table 5. Merging Logic Used for Synchronizing Integration Objects
Integration Object Metadata Merging Rules
Objects Validate that Business Object still exists.
Components Present the tree of components based on current business

object definition. The components present in the current
integration object are checked in the UI tree, other
components presented as Inactive. User decides which
components to add or delete. This is done by the
Synchronization wizard UI.
Fields Keep the current integration component fields if still present

in the business component, otherwise delete. Add new fields
in a way that does not conflict with existing ones (see
Sequence for more information).
System fields are created when appropriate (for example

searchspec, IsPrimaryMVG, and operation). If the system
field is inconsistent with the integration component
definition, delete it.
Active/InactivePreserve the current integration

component field value unless Business Component Field is
Required (field must be present during Insert). Otherwise,
new fields are created Inactive.
XML Properties Preserve the current integration object values to keep XML
compatible. Add new components/fields properties avoiding
conflict with existing XML.
XML Properties are processed according to the XML

sequence. New components/fields that sequence within the
parent component element will be higher than current.
Existing processing code should be reused (and checked for

correct behavior).
External Sequence on components Preserve the component or field sequence within the parent
or fields component. Set the sequence on new components or fields
higher than the existing ones.
Name Preserve Names in the current integration object.

Table 5. Merging Logic Used for Synchronizing Integration Objects
Integration Object Metadata Merging Rules
User key, Hierarchy key, Other keys Existing Keys:

(for example, Status Key)
Keep existing keys as Active if all the key fields are
Active.
Keep existing keys Inactive if Inactive already or make

Inactive if any of the fields are Inactive.
If a field is Inactive in an integration component, make

it Inactive in the key. Make the key Inactive.
If a field is not present in an integration component,

delete it from the key. Make the key Inactive.
New Keys:
Create new keys as Inactive.
If any of the key fields are Inactive, either:
Do not create the key.
Make fields Active in the integration component.
User Properties Preserve valid cases, remove invalid ones, and generate
warnings.

Table 6 shows the logic that will be used when synchronizing user properties.
Table 6. Logic Used for Synchronizing User Properties
Level
Values (Object,
(Default is Component,
User Property Name in italics) or Field) Merging Rules
Association Y,N C Siebel Wizard generates the value

based on current business component
definition. The Wizard overwrites the
user change, because in order for the
integration component to be functional,
the User Property has to be consistent
with the business component.
MVG Y,N C Siebel Wizard generates the value

based on the current business
component definition. The Wizard
overwrites the user change, because in
order for integration component to be
functional, the User Property has to be
consistent with the business
component.
IsPrimaryMVG system field is created

in the merged integration object.
Picklist Y,N F Siebel Wizard generated. The user

change is kept if valid (if Picklist
component).
Review the input object for a user

property of PICKLIST. Copy from the
current field.
PicklistUserKeys Any active F Entered by user, keep only Active

fields fields. User Property is valid only if
PICKLIST is set to Y on the integration
component.
If no Active fields left, remove the user

property.
Ignore Bounded Picklist Y,N O, C, F Entered by user, keep if valid (if

component Picklist is set to Y).

Level
Values (Object,
MVGAssociation Y,N C Siebel Wizard generates the value

based on the current business
component definition. The Wizard
overwrites the user change, because in
order for integration component to be
functional, the User Property has to be
consistent with the business
component.
IsPrimaryMVG system field is created

in merged integration object.
MVGFieldName Any valid F Siebel Wizard generates the value

field name in based on current business component
the MVG definition. The Wizard overwrites the
business user change, because in order for
component integration component to be functional,
the User Property has to be consistent
(component MVG is set to Y)
AssocFieldName Any valid F Siebel Wizard generates the value

field name in based on current business component
the definition. The Wizard overwrites the
Association user change, because in order for the
business integration component to be functional,
component the User Property has to be consistent
(component MVGAssociation is set to
Y)
NoInsert, NoDelete, Y,N C, F Entered by the user. Keep the current

NoUpdate, NoQuery, (NoUpdate) value.
NoSynchronize
FieldDependencyFieldNa Any active F Entered by the user. Keep the current

me integration value if valid (if FieldName field is
component Active).
name within
the same
integration
component
AdminMode Y, N C, O Entered by the user; if the value exists,

keep it. Otherwise, the wizard sets the
value to N.

Creating and Maintaining Integration Objects Generating Integration Object Schemas
Level
Values (Object,
ViewMode All, Manager, O Entered by the user; if the value exists,

Sales Rep, keep it. Otherwise, the wizard sets the
and any value to All.
others
AllLangIndependentVals Y,N O Entered by the user; if the value exists,

keep it. Otherwise, the wizard sets the
value to N.
IgnorePermissionErrors Y,N C Entered by the user. Keep the current

OnUpdate, value.
IgnorePermissionErrors
OnInsert,
IgnorePermissionErrors
OnDelete
ForceUpdate Y,N O Entered by the user. Keep the current

value.
SupressQueryOnInsert Y,N C Entered by the user. Keep the current

value.
Generating Integration Object Schemas

At certain points in your integration project, you may want to generate schemas from an integration
object. If you export Siebel integration objects as XML to other applications, you may need to publish
the schemas of such objects so that other applications can learn about the structure of the XML to
expect.
To generate an integration object schema

1 In Siebel Tools, select the integration object for which you want to generate a schema.

Creating and Maintaining Integration Objects Optimizing the Performance of
Integration Objects
2 Click Generate Schema to access the Generate XML Schema wizard.
3 Choose the business service to use to generate the schema:
EAI XML DTD Generator. Generates a Document Type Definition (DTD).
EAI XML XDR Generator. Generates an XML-Data Reduced (XDR) schema.
EAI XML XSD Generator. Generates an XML Schema Definition (XSD).
4 Choose an envelope type to use in the schema, either none or Siebel Message Envelope.
5 Choose a location where you want to save the resulting schema file.
6 (Optional) Select the Include length information for String type checkbox to generate simple
types for all string elements in the integration object schema.
7 Click Finish.
The wizard generates the selected type of schema for the integration object. Use this to help you
map external data directly to the integration object. The schema serves as the definition for the XML
elements you can create using an external application or XML editing tool.
Optimizing the Performance of

Integration Objects
To optimize your integration object performance, you may want to consider the following:
Size of Integration Object

The size of an integration object and its underlying business components can have an impact on the
latency of the EAI Siebel Adapter operations. Inactivate unnecessary fields and components in your
integration objects.

Creating and Maintaining Integration Objects About Business Component Restrictions
for Integration Components
Force-Active Fields
Reexamine any fields in the underlying business component that have the force-active specification.
Such fields are processed during the integration even if they are not included in the integration
component. You might want to consider removing the force-active specification from such fields,
unless you absolutely need them.
Picklist Validation
Siebel applications have two classes of picklistsstatic picklists based on lists of values and dynamic
picklists based on joins.
Setting the property PICKLIST to Y in the integration object field directs the EAI Siebel Adapter to
validate that all operations conform to the picklist specified in the field. For dynamic picklists, this
setting is essential to make sure the joins are resolved properly. However, for unbounded static
picklists, this validation may be unnecessary and can be turned off by setting the PICKLIST property
to N. Even for bounded static picklists, you can turn off validation in the adapter, because the Object
Manager can perform the validation. Turning off the validation at the EAI Siebel Adapter level means
that picklist-related warnings and debugging messages do not show up along with other EAI Siebel
Adapter messages. This also means that bounded picklist errors will not be ignored, even if Ignore
Bounded Picklist is set to Y.
As well as certain warnings and messages not appearing, setting the integration component field user
property PICKLIST to N can also cause fields to be auto-completed. Providing only part of the value
for a particular field causes the field to be auto-filled with the first matching entry in the picklist. This
occurs especially when the picklist is based on a multilingual list of values (MLOV). For example, if
the incoming message contains the string On- and there exists an entry On-Hold, the field will
be set to On-Hold.
If the EAI Siebel Adapter performs the validation (PICKLIST is set to Y), auto-filling of the field does
not occur. In this case, the EAI Siebel Adapter supports only an exact match for the particular field
(in the previous example, the value On- will fail; only On-Hold will pass).
NOTE: Performing the validation of a bounded picklist in the EAI Siebel Adapter is about 10% faster
than performing the validation in the Object Manager.
About Business Component Restrictions

for Integration Components
The business components underlying the Integration Components may have certain restrictions. For
example, only an administrator can modify the Internal Product. The same restrictions apply during
integration. In many cases, the Siebel Integration Object Builder wizard detects the restrictions, and
sets properties such as No Insert or No Update on the integration components.

Creating and Maintaining Integration Objects Best Practices for Using Integration
Components
System Fields
Integration object fields marked as System are not exported during a query operation. This setting
prevents the EAI Siebel Adapter from treating the field as a data field, which means for the Query
and QueryPage method the EAI Siebel Adapter do not write to the field. For the Synchronize and
Update method, the field will not be directly set in the business component unless the ISPrimaryMVG
is set to Y.
If you want to include System fields in the exported message, change the Integration Component
field type to Data.
NOTE: System fields are read-only. If you attempt to send a message with the value set for a System
field, the setting will be ignored and a warning message will be logged.
Best Practices for Using Integration

Components
The following are the best practices for using integration components:
Familiarize yourself with the business logic in the business components. Integration designers
should use the presentation layer, or the user interface to get a good sense of how the business
component behaves, and what operations are allowed and not allowed.
Design with performance in mind. For more information on performance and using integration
objects, see Optimizing the Performance of Integration Objects on page 60.
Design with maintenance in mind. For more information on maintenance, see Best Practices for
Maintaining Integration Objects on page 52.

Components
Resolve configuration conflicts. During the development of your integration points, you might
encounter issues with the configuration of business components that are configured to support
interactive GUI usage, but do not satisfy your integration requirements.
The following scenarios demonstrate three different situations in which you might encounter such
conflicts and a possible solution for each case:
Scenario 1. Your integration requires explicitly setting a primary child, but the business
component configuration does not allow that, because the related MVLink has Auto Primary
property set to Default.
Solution. Change the Auto Primary property from Default to Selected. This enables the EAI
Siebel Adapter to change the Auto Primary property according to the input request, while making
sure that there is always a primary child selected.
Scenario 2. A business component such as Internal Product is made read-only for regular GUI
usage, but you want your integration process to be able to update the Internal Product business
component.
Solution. Set the AdminMode user property on the integration object to Y. This allows the EAI
Siebel Adapter to use the business component in an administrator mode.
Scenario 3. Similar to scenario 2, a business component such as Internal Product is made read-
only for regular GUI usage, but you want your integration process to be able to update the
Internal Product business component. The only difference in this scenario is that the business
component is used through a link that has NoUpdate property set to Y.
Solution. Because there is a link with NoUpdate property set to Y, setting the AdminMode user
property on the integration object to Y is not going to help. You must create the following
exclusively for integration purposes:
A new link based on the original link with NoUpdate property Set to N.
A copy of the original business object referencing the new link instead of the original. Note
that both links must use the same business component.
NOTE: Customized configurations are not automatically upgraded during the Siebel Repository
upgrade, so use this option as a last resort.

Components

4 Business Services
This chapter outlines the basic concepts of a business service, its structure and purpose, and how
you can customize and create your own business service. This chapter also describes how to test
your business service before it is implemented. The following topics are included:
About Business Services on page 65
Creating Business Services in Siebel Tools on page 68
Creating Business Services in the Siebel Application on page 71
Deploying Business Services as Web Services on page 72
Exporting and Importing Business Services in Siebel Tools on page 73
Importing Business Services into the Siebel Application on page 73
Testing Your Business Service in the Simulator on page 73
About Accessing a Business Service Using Siebel eScript or Siebel VB on page 74
Business Scenario for the Use of Business Services on page 75
About Business Services

A business service is an object that encapsulates and simplifies the use of some set of functionality.
Business components and business objects are objects that are typically tied to specific data and
tables in the Siebel data model. Business services, on the other hand, are not tied to specific objects,
but rather operate or act upon objects to achieve a particular goal.
Business services can simplify the task of moving data and converting data formats between the
Siebel application and external applications. Business services can also be used outside the context
of Siebel EAI to accomplish other types of tasks, such as performing a standard tax calculation, a
shipping rate calculation, or other specialized functions.
The business service can be assessed either directly by way of workflows (business processes) or by
way of a scripting service written in Siebel VB or Siebel eScript.
About Creating Business Services on page 66
Business Service Structure on page 66
Property Sets on page 67

Business Services About Business Services
About Creating Business Services

A Siebel application provides a number of prebuilt business services to assist you with your
integration tasks. These services are based on specialized classes and are called Specialized Business
Services. Many of these are used internally to manage a variety of tasks.
CAUTION: As with other specialized code such as Business Components, use only the specialized
services that are documented in Siebel documentation. The use of undocumented services is not
supported and can lead to undesired and unpredictable results.
In addition to the prebuilt business services, you can build your own business service and its
functionality in two different ways to suit your business requirements:
In Siebel Tools. Created at design time in Siebel Tools using Siebel VB or Siebel eScript. Design-
time business services are stored in the Siebel repository (.SRF), so you have to compile the
repository before testing them. When your test is completed, compile and disseminate the SRF
to your clients. The business services stored in the repository automatically come over to the
new repository during the upgrade process. General business services are based on the class
CSSService. However, for the purposes of Siebel EAI, you base your data transformation business
services on the CSSEAIDTEScriptService class. For information, see Creating Business Services
in Siebel Tools on page 68.
In Siebel client. Created at run time in the Siebel client using the Business Service
Administration screens. Run-time business services are stored in the Siebel run-time database,
so they can be tested right away. The run-time business services have to be migrated manually
after an upgrade process. For information, see Creating Business Services in the Siebel
Application on page 71.
NOTE: To use the DTE scripts, write your business service in Siebel eScript; otherwise, you can write
them in Siebel VB.
Business Service Structure

Business services allow developers to encapsulate business logic in a central location, abstracting
the logic from the data it may act upon. A business service is much like an object in an object-
oriented programming language.
A business service has properties and methods, and maintains a state. Methods take arguments that
can be passed into the object programmatically or, in the case of Siebel EAI, declaratively by way of
workflows.
NOTE: For more information on business service methods and method arguments, see Siebel Object
Interfaces Reference.

Business Services About Business Services
Property Sets
Property sets are used internally to represent Siebel EAI data. A property set is a logical memory
structure that is used to pass the data between business services. Figure 22 illustrates the concept
of a property set.
Figure 22. Property Set Structure
The property set consists of four parts:
Type. Used to describe what type of object is being represented.
Value. Used to hold serialized data, such as a string of XML data.
NOTE: In Siebel Tools, a Value argument to a method is shown with the name of <Value>,
including the angle brackets. You can also define a Display Name for the Value argument in Siebel
Tools. This Display Name appears in the Siebel Business Process Designer when you are building
integration workflows. In this guide, the Display Name Message Text is shown when referring to
the Value argument, and the Name <Value> is shown when referring to the Value of the Value
argument.
Properties. A table containing name-value pairs. You can use the properties to represent column
names and data, field names and data, or other types of name-value pairs.
Children. An array of child-level property sets. You can use the array to represent instances of
integration objects. For example, a result set may contain an Account with some set of contact
records from the database. Each contact record is represented as a child property set.
It is recommended that you treat input property sets in business services as constants. If you need
to modify the inputs, make a copy first. Otherwise, there might be interference between business
service scripts and workflow processes that also modify the inputs, leading to unpredictable
application behavior.

Business Services Creating Business Services in Siebel Tools
For example, when creating the XMLHierarchy property set using a custom business service in a
workflow process, if the input property set is modified without making a copy, the following error
occurs:
Argument 'XMLHierarchy' in step 'Convert XMLHierarchy' is not correctly initialized

or does not return valid data.(SBL-BPR-00107)
NOTE: For more information on property sets and their methods, see Siebel Object Interfaces
Reference.
Creating Business Services in Siebel

Tools
The following procedures explain how to create business services and business service scripts in
Siebel Tools:
Defining a Business Service in Siebel Tools on page 68.
Defining Business Service Methods on page 69
Defining Business Service Method Arguments on page 69
Writing Business Service Scripts on page 70
Defining Business Service User Properties on page 70
NOTE: Business services you create in Siebel Tools must be compiled into the Siebel .srf file. If you
intend to run the business services on your Siebel Server, then copy the compiled .srf file to your
SIEBEL_ROOT\Objects\lang_code directory.
Defining a Business Service in Siebel Tools

You declaratively define the business service in Siebel Tools, and then add your scripts to the
business service in the Siebel Script Editor within Siebel Tools.
To define a business service in Siebel Tools

1 In Siebel Tools, select and lock the project with which you want to associate your business
service.
NOTE: Each business service must belong to a project, and the project must be locked. For more
information, see Using Siebel Tools.
2 Select the Business Services object in the Tools Object Explorer.
The list of predefined business services appears in the right panel.
3 Right-click, and then choose New Record.
4 Type a name in the Name field of the new business service.
5 From the pull-down menu in the Project field, pick the project you locked in Step 1.

6 Choose the appropriate class for your business service from the Class picklist:
Data transformation business services must use the CSSEAIDTEScriptService class.
Other business services will typically use the CSSService class.
7 Step off the current record to save your changes.
Defining Business Service Methods

Business services contain related methods that provide the ability to perform a particular task or set
of tasks.
NOTE: For information on business service methods, see Siebel Object Interfaces Reference.
To define a business service method

1 With your business service selected in Siebel Tools, expand the Business Service tree in the
Object Explorer, and then select Business Service Method.
The Business Service Methods list appears in the Object List Editor. If you have already defined
methods for the selected business service, they appear in the Business Services Methods list.
3 Type the name of the method in the Name field of the new method.
Defining Business Service Method Arguments

Each method can take one or more arguments. The argument is passed to the method and consists
of some data or object that the method processes to complete its task.
To define business service method arguments

1 With your business service method selected in Siebel Tools, expand the Business Service Method
tree in the Object Explorer, and then select Business Service Method Args.
The Business Service Methods Args list appears in the Object List Editor.
3 Type the name of the argument in the Name field of the new method argument record.
NOTE: If you plan to use this business service in a Siebel Business Application, specify the
Display Name as well.
4 Enter the data type in the Data Type field.
5 Check the Optional check box if you do not want the argument to be required for the method.

6 Choose a Type for the argument. Refer to the following table for a list of different types and their
descriptions.
Argument Description
Input This type of argument serves as input to the method.
Input/ This type of argument serves as both input to the method

Output and output from the method.
Output This type of argument serves as output from the method.
Writing Business Service Scripts

Business service scripts supply the actual functionality of the business service in either Siebel VB or
Siebel eScript. As with any object, the script you provide is attached to the business service.
To write business service scripts

1 In Siebel Tools, select the business service for which you want to write a script.
2 Right-click, and then choose Edit Server Scripts.
The Siebel Script Editor appears.
3 Select either Siebel eScript or Visual Basic for your scripting language.
4 Select Service_PreInvokedMethod as the event handler.
NOTE: To write any Siebel VB script in the Business Services, your deployment platform must
support Siebel VB.
5 Type your script into the Script Editor.
NOTE: Write your business service in Siebel eScript if you want to use the DTE scripts. For
information on scripting, see Using Siebel Tools.
Defining Business Service User Properties

User properties are optional variables that you can use to define default values for your business
services in Siebel Tools. When a script or control invokes your business service, one of the first tasks
the service performs is to check the user properties to gather any default values that will become
input arguments to the services methods.
To define business service user properties

1 With your business service selected in Siebel Tools, expand the Business Service tree in the
Object Explorer, and then select Business Service User Prop.
The Business Service User Props list appears in the Object List Editor.

Business Services Creating Business Services in the Siebel Application
3 Type the name of the user property in the Name field of the new record.
4 Type a value in the Value field.
The value can be an integer, a string, or a Boolean.
Creating Business Services in the Siebel

Application
You can define business services in the Siebel Business Application using the Business Service
Administration screens. The business services you create in the client are stored in the Siebel
Database. This section illustrates the creation of business services using the Business Service
Methods view, which includes applets to create and display the business service.
To define a business service in the Siebel application

1 Navigate to Administration - Business Service > Methods.
2 Click New to create a new record in the Methods form applet:
Name. Name of the business service.
Cache. If checked then the business service instance remains in existence until the users
session is finished; otherwise, the business service instance will be deleted after it finishes
executing.
Inactive. Check if you do not want to use the business service.
3 Define methods for the business service in the Methods list applet:
Name. Name of the method.

Inactive. Check if you do not want to use the method.
4 Define method arguments for the methods in the Method Arguments list applet:
Name. Name of the method argument.
Type. The type of the business service method argument. Valid values are Output, Input,
and Input/Output.
Optional. Check if you do not want this argument to be optional.
Inactive. Check if you do not want to use the argument.
5 From the link bar, select Scripts.
6 Write your Siebel eScript or VB code in the Business Service Scripts list applet.
NOTE: To write any Siebel VB script in the Business Services, your deployment platform must
support Siebel VB.
7 Click Check Syntax to check the syntax of the business service script.

Business Services Deploying Business Services as Web Services
Deploying Business Services as Web

Services
You can deploy business services, which you have created in Siebel Tools, as Web services. The Web
services can then be consumed by other applications, such as the Siebel Self-Service Applications.
To be deployed, a business service must have at least one accessible method that is supported in
Siebel inbound Web services. The business service must include a valid integration object name for
any hierarchical argument.
NOTE: The Hierarchy type is not supported unless a valid integration object name is specified.
For more information on Web services, see Chapter 5, Web Services. For more information on Siebel
Self-Service Applications, see Siebel Self-Service Application Developers Guide.
To deploy a business service as a Web service

1 In the Object Explorer in Siebel Tools, select the Business Service object.
The Business Services list appears.
2 In the Object List Editor, right-click the business service to deploy, and then choose Deploy as
Web Service.
The Expose Business Service as Web Service dialog box appears.
3 Specify the following in the dialog box, and then click Finish:
Business service methods to expose. The operation names for the business service
methods are system generated. To edit an operation name, click it in the list.
URL for the Web service. Replace <webserver> with a valid host name and <lang> with a
valid language code, such as enu.
Generate WSDL checkbox. To generate a Web Services Description Language (WSDL) file,
select the checkbox, and then choose a location to save the WSDL file.
The business service is deployed. Deployed business services are shown in the Administration -
Business Services screen in the Siebel client. Deployed Web services are shown in the Administration
- Web Services > Inbound Web Services view.
You can also remove (undeploy) deployed business services from the Siebel run-time database.
To undeploy a business service

1 In the Siebel client, navigate to Administration - Business Services.
The Details list appears.
2 Query for the deployed business service, and then select it.
3 Click Delete.
The business service is undeployed.

Business Services Exporting and Importing Business Services in Siebel Tools
Exporting and Importing Business

Services in Siebel Tools
You can export business services into an XML file by clicking Export in the Business Services list in
the Object List Editor. This writes the definition of the business serviceincluding every method,
method argument, and scriptinto the XML file.
You can import a business service from an external XML file by clicking Import in the Business
Services list in the Object List Editor.
Importing Business Services into the

Siebel Application
You can import business services, which you have created in Siebel Tools and exported as XML files,
into the Siebel run-time database. This saves time by allowing you to modify business service
definitions without having to shut down your production environment, edit the business services in
Siebel Tools, and then recompile the SRF.
To import a business service into the Siebel application

1 Navigate to Administration - Business Service > Details.
2 From the Menu pull-down, choose Import Service.
3 The Business Service Import dialog appears.
4 Browse for a business service XML file, and then click Import.
Testing Your Business Service in the

Simulator
You can use the Business Service Simulator to test your business services in an interactive mode.
To run the Business Service Simulator

1 Navigate to Administration - Business Service > Simulator.
NOTE: The contents of the Simulator view are not persistent. To save the data entered in the
applets, click the Save To File button. This will save the data for the active applet in an XML file.
The data can then be loaded into the next session from an XML file by clicking on the Load From
File button.
2 In the Simulator list applet, click New to add the business service you want to test.
3 Specify the Service Name and the Method Name.
4 Enter the number of iterations you want to run the business service:

Business Services About Accessing a Business Service Using Siebel eScript or Siebel VB
Specify the input parameters for the Business Service Method in the Input Property Set
applet. Multiple Input Property Sets can be defined and are identified by specifying a Test
Case #.
If the Input Property Set has multiple properties, these can be specified by clicking on the
glyph in the Property Name field. Hierarchical Property Sets can also be defined by clicking
on the glyph in the Child Type field.
5 Click Run to run the business service.
The Simulator runs the specified number of iterations and loops through the test cases in order.
If you have defined multiple input arguments, you can choose to run only one argument at a time
by clicking Run On One Input.
The result appears in the Output Property Set applet.
NOTE: When the Output arguments are created, you can click Move To Input to test the outputs
as inputs to another method.
About Accessing a Business Service

Using Siebel eScript or Siebel VB
In addition to accessing a business service through a workflow process, you can use Siebel VB or
eScript to call a business service. The following Siebel eScript code calls the business service EAI
XML Read from File to read an XML file, and produces a property set as an output. The EAI Siebel
Adapter uses the output property set to insert a new account into the Siebel application:
var svcReadFile = TheApplication().GetService("EAI XML Read from File") ;
var svcSaveData = TheApplication().GetService("EAI Siebel Adapter");
var child = TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
var psInputs = TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
var psOutputs = TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
var psOutputs2 = TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
var svcSaveData = TheApplication().GetService("EAI Siebel Adapter");
psInputs.SetProperty("FileName", "c:\\NewAccount.xml");
psOutputs.SetType "SiebelMessage";
psOutputs.SetProperty "IntObjectName","Sample Account";
psOutputs.SetProperty "MessageId", "";
psOutputs.SetProperty "MessageType", "Integration Object";
svcReadFile.InvokeMethod("ReadEAIMsg",psInputs, psOutputs);
svcSaveData.InvokeMethod("Upsert",psOutputs,psOutputs2);

Business Services Business Scenario for the Use of Business Services
The following Siebel VB sample code shows how to call the EAI File Transport business service to read
an XML file. It also shows how to use the XML Converter business service to produce a property set:
Set Inp = TheApplication.NewPropertySet
Inp.SetProperty "FileName", "c:\test.xml"
Inp.SetProperty "DispatchService", "XML Converter"
Inp.SetProperty "DispatchMethod" , "XMLToPropSet"
Set svc = theApplication.GetService("EAI File Transport")
Set XMLOutputs = theApplication.NewPropertySet
svc.InvokeMethod "ReceiveDispatch", Inp, XMLOutputs
TheApplication.RaiseErrorText Cstr(XMLOutputs.GetChildCount)
Business Scenario for the Use of

Business Services
Consider an example of a form on a corporate Web site. Many visitors during the day enter their
personal data into the fields on the Web form. The field names represent arguments, whereas the
personal data represent data. When the visitor clicks Submit on the form, the forms CGI script
formats and sends the data by way of the HTTP transport protocol to the corporate Web server. The
CGI script can be written in JavaScript, Perl, or another scripting language.
The CGI script might have extracted the field names and created XML elements from them to
resemble the following XML tags:
First Name = <FirstName></FirstName>
Last Name = <LastName></LastName>
The CGI script might then have wrapped each data item inside the XML tags:
<FirstName>Hector</FirstName>
<LastName>Alacon</LastName>
To insert the preceding data into the Siebel Database as a Contact, your script calls a business
service that formats the XML input into a property set structure that the Siebel application
recognizes.
Code Sample Example for Creating a Property

The following is an example of the Siebel eScript code that you must write to create the property set:
x = TheApplication.InvokeMethod("WebForm", inputs, outputs);
var svc; // variable to contain the handle to the Service

var inputs; // variable to contain the XML input
var outputs; // variable to contain the output property set
svc = TheApplication().GetService("EAI XML Read from File");
inputs = TheApplication().ReadEAIMsg("webform.xml");
outputs = TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
svc.InvokeMethod("Read XML Hierarchy", inputs, outputs);
The following functions could be called from the preceding code. You attach the function to a business
service in Siebel Tools:
NOTE: You cannot pass a business object as an argument to a business service method.
Function Service_PreInvokeMethod(MethodName, inputs, outputs)
if (MethodName=="GetWebContact")
fname = inputs.GetProperty("<First Name>");
lname = inputs.GetProperty("<Last Name>");
outputs.SetProperty("First Name",fname);
outputs.SetProperty("Last Name", lname);
return(CancelOperation);
return(ContinueOperation);
Function Service_PreCanInvokeMethod(MethodName, CanInvoke)
if (MethodName="GetWebContact")
CanInvoke ="TRUE";
return (CancelOperation);
else

return (ContinueOperation);


5 Web Services
This chapter describes Web services, their uses, and how to create, implement, and publish Siebel
Web services. This chapter also provides examples of how to invoke an external Web service and a
Siebel Web service. The following topics are included:
About Web Services on page 79
About RPC-Literal and DOC-Literal Bindings on page 80
About One-Way Operations and Web Services on page 82
Invoking Siebel Web Services Using an External System on page 83
Consuming External Web Services Using Siebel Web Services on page 86
About the Local Business Service on page 92
About XML Schema Support for the <xsd:any> Tag on page 92
Examples of Invoking Web Services on page 94
About Web Services Security Support on page 98
About Siebel Authentication and Session Management SOAP Headers on page 102
About Web Services and Web Single Sign-On Authentication on page 109
About Passing Localization Information in SOAP Headers on page 109
About Custom SOAP Filters on page 110
About Web Services Cache Refresh on page 113

Enabling Web Services Tracing on page 113
About Web Services

Web services combine component-based development and Internet standards and protocols that
include HTTP, XML, Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP), and Web Services Description Language
(WSDL). You can reuse Web services regardless of how they are implemented. Web services can be
developed on any computer platform and in any development environment as long as they can
communicate with other Web services using these common protocols.
Business services or workflow processes in Siebel Business Applications can be exposed as Web
services to be consumed by an application, such as one of the Siebel Self-Service Applications. Siebel
Web Services framework has an ability to generate WSDL files to describe the Web services hosted
by the Siebel application. Also, the Siebel Web Services framework can call external Web services.
This is accomplished by importing a WSDL document, described as an external Web service, using
the WSDL Import Wizard in Siebel Tools.

Web Services About RPC-Literal and DOC-Literal Bindings
To specify the structure of XML used in the body of SOAP messages, Web services use an XML Schema
Definition (XSD) standard. The XSD standard describes an XML document structure in terms of XML
elements and attributes. It also specifies abstract data types, and defines and extends the value
domains.
Users or programs interact with Web services by exchanging XML messages that conform to Simple
Object Access Protocol (SOAP). For Web services support, SOAP provides a standard SOAP envelope,
standard encoding rules that specify mapping of data based on an abstract data type into an XML
instance and back, and conventions for how to make remote procedure calls (RPC) using SOAP
messages.
Supported Web Services Standards

The following Web services standards are supported by Siebel Business Applications:
Web Services Description Language (WSDL) 1.1. For information, see http://www.w3.org/TR/
2001/NOTE-wsdl-20010315.
Web Services Security (WS-Security) based on the clear-text UserName Token mechanism. For
information, see the following:
About WS-Security UserName Token Profile Support on page 100
http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/ws/2002/07/secext
Web Services Interoperability (WS-I) Basic Profile 1.0. For information, see http://www.ws-i.org/
deliverables/workinggroup.aspx?wg=basicprofile.
Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) 1.1. For information, see http://www.w3.org/TR/2000/
NOTE-SOAP-20000508.
Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) 1.1. For information, see http://www.w3.org/Protocols/

rfc2616/rfc2616.html.
Extensible Markup Language (XML) 1.0. For information, see http://www.w3.org/TR/xml.
XML Schema. For information, see http://www.w3.org/TR/2001/REC-xmlschema-1-20010502 and

http://www.w3.org/TR/2001/REC-xmlschema-2-20010502.
NOTE: For more details on supported elements and attributes, see XML Reference: Siebel Enterprise
About RPC-Literal and DOC-Literal

Bindings
In Siebel Business Applications, publishing a Siebel Web service as a Document-Literal (DOC-Literal)
or RPC-Literal bound Web service partly conforms to the specification as defined by the Web Services
Interoperability Organization's (WS-I) Basic Profile specification. Adherence to this specification
makes sure that Siebel applications can interoperate with external Web service providers.
WS-I is a trademark of the Web Services Interoperability Organization in the United States and other
countries.

Web Services About RPC-Literal and DOC-Literal Bindings
RPC-Literal Support
RPC allows the use of transports other than HTTP (for example, MQ and MSMQ), because you do not
have to use the SOAPAction header to specify the operation.
The following specifications are required for using RPC-literal:
Specification R2717. An RPC-literal binding in a description must have the namespace attribute
specified, the value of which must be an absolute uniformed resource instant (URI), on contained
soapbind:body elements.
Specification R2729. A message described with an RPC-literal binding that is a response message
must have a wrapper element whose name is the corresponding wsdl:operation name suffixed with
the string Response.
Specification R2735. A message described with an RPC-literal binding must place the part
accessory elements for parameters and return value in no namespace.
Specification R2207. A wsdl:message in a description may contain wsdl:parts that use the
elements attribute provided that those wsdl:parts are not referred to by a soapbind:body in an rpc-
literal binding.
Making a Web Service an RPC-Literal Web Service

RPC Literal processing is enabled by rendering a Web service as an RPC-literal Web service, and
choosing the correct binding on the Inbound Web Services view.
To make a Web service an RPC-literal Web service

1 Navigate to Administration - Web Services > Inbound Web Services.
2 Select or add a new namespace from the Inbound Web Services list applet following the
instructions in Invoking Siebel Web Services Using an External System on page 83.
3 Create a new inbound service port record in the Service Ports list applet as indicated in Invoking
Siebel Web Services Using an External System on page 83, and in the Binding column select
SOAP_RPC_LITERAL from the drop-down list.
DOC-Literal Support
When a SOAP DOC-literal binding is used, the SOAP envelope (the Body element) will contain the
document WSDL part without any wrapper elements. The SOAP operation is determined by way of a
SOAPAction HTTP header.
NOTE: SOAP:Body is in the instance SOAP message, but soapbind:body is the attribute in the WSDL
document.
The following is a restriction for using DOC-literalSpecification R2716. A document-literal binding

in a description must not have the namespace attribute specified on contained soapbind:body,
soapbind:header, soapbind:headerfault, and soapbind:fault elements.

Web Services About One-Way Operations and Web Services
Making a Web service a DOC-literal one is the same as described in Making a Web Service an RPC-
Literal Web Service on page 81. When creating the new inbound service port record in the Service
Ports list applet, select SOAP_DOC_LITERAL from the drop-down list in the Binding column.
About One-Way Operations and Web

Services
One-Way operations provide a means of sending a request to a Web service with the expectation that
a SOAP response will not be returned. The Siebel application provides the ability to publish and
consume Web services that implement one-way operations.
One-way operations come into play in both inbound and outbound scenarios:
Inbound. If the Business Service Workflow method does not have any output arguments, it is a
one-way operation.
Outbound. If the service proxy method has no output arguments, it is a one-way operation.
Consider using one-way operations when data loss is tolerable. In cases involving one-way
operations, you send a SOAP request and do not receive a SOAP response. The provider receives the
SOAP request and processes it.
NOTE: It is important to note that SOAP faults, if any, are not returned as well.
Defining Support for One-Way Operations

In defining support for one-way operations, the following WS-I Basic Profile specifications are taken
into account:
Specification R2714. For a one-way operation, an instance must not return a HTTP response
that contains a SOAP envelope. Specifically, the HTTP response entity-body must be empty.
Specification R2715. An instance must not consider transmission of one-way operations

complete until a HTTP response status code of either 200 OK or 202 Accepted is received by the
HTTP client.
Specification R2727. For one-way operations, an instance must not interpret the HTTP
response status code of 200 OK or 202 Accepted to mean the message is valid or that the receiver
would process it.

Web Services Invoking Siebel Web Services Using an External System
Invoking Siebel Web Services Using an

External System
The Siebel application allows enterprises to publish any business service or business process as a
Web service. This process is also known as creating an inbound Web service. When the business
service or business process is defined, a Siebel administrator navigates to Administration - Web
Services > Inbound Web Services in the Siebel Web Client, and publishes it as a Web service. When
the business service or business process is published as a Web service, the administrator generates
the Web Service Definition Language (WSDL) document for the newly created Web service. The
resulting WSDL document is consumed by an external application to invoke this Web service.
NOTE: In version 8.1, you can deploy business services and workflow processes as Web services and
generate WSDL files directly from Siebel Tools. For information on deploying business services, see
Deploying Business Services as Web Services on page 72. For information on deploying workflow
processes as Web services, see Siebel Business Process Framework: Workflow Guide.
Publishing Inbound Web Services

You can create and publish an inbound Web service using the Inbound Web Services view, as
illustrated in the following procedure. You can then use the new inbound Web service when
generating a WSDL document.
NOTE: If publishing an ASI as an inbound Web service, make sure that the ASI is enabled for
external use in Siebel Tools.
To create an inbound Web service

1 Navigate to Administration - Web Services > Inbound Web Services.
2 In the Inbound Web Services list, create a new record:

a Enter the namespace for your organizations Web services in the Namespace column.
NOTE: This step is required for generating various XML documents.
b Enter the name of the inbound Web service in the Name column.
c Select Active in the Status field to enable external applications to call the Web service.
NOTE: If the Web service is inactive, then the external applications cannot invoke the Web
service without clearing the cache.
d (Optional) Enter a description of the Web service in the Comment column.
3 Create an inbound service port record in the Service Ports list:
a Click New and enter the name of the port in the Name column.
b Pick the type of object published. If the required type is not available, add a new type following
Step c through Step f; otherwise, move to Step g.
c Click New and select the implementation type (Business Service or Workflow Process).

d Select the implementation name (the business service or business process that implements the
port type).
e Enter a name for the new type in the Name field and click Save.
f Click Pick in the Inbound Web Services Port Type Pick Applet to complete the process of adding
a new Type.
g Select the protocol or transport that will publish the Web service.
h Enter the address appropriate for the transport chosen:
For the HTTP Transport, enter an HTTP address of the Web service to be called, such as
http://mycompany.com/webservice/orderservice.
For the JMS Transport, enter the following:
jms://YourQueueName@YourConnectionFactory
For the Local Web Service transport, enter the name of the inbound port.
For the EAI MSMQ Server transport, enter one of the following:
mq://YourQueueName@YourQueueManagerName
msmq://YourQueueName@YourQueueMachineName
NOTE: When publishing using EAI MQSeries, EAI MSMQ, or EAI JMS, you cannot generate
WSDL files.
i Select the binding that will publish the Web service.
NOTE: RPC_Encoded, RPC_Literal, and DOC_Literal styles of binding are supported for
publishing Web services.
j Enter a description of the Port in the Comment column.
4 In the Operations list, create a new operation record for the new service port:
NOTE: Only the operations created in this step will be published and usable by applications
calling the Web service. Other business service methods will not be available to external
applications and can only be used for internal business service calls.
a Enter the name of the Web service operation.
b Select the name of the business service method in the Method Display Name column.
NOTE: The Method Display Name column defaults to RunProcess if you chose Workflow
Process as the type for your service port. However, you can change this to another name.
c Select the authentication type from the drop-down list.
For more information on using the Username/Password Authentication Type, see About RPC-
Literal and DOC-Literal Bindings on page 80.

Generating a WSDL File

The WSDL file specifies the interface to the inbound Web service. This file is used by Web service
clients to support creation of code to invoke the Siebel Web service.
When you have created a new inbound Web service record you can generate a WSDL document, as
described in the following procedure.
To generate a WSDL file

1 In the Inbound Web Services view, choose the inbound Web services you want to publish, and
then click Generate WSDL.
A WSDL file is generated that describes the Web service.
2 Save the generated file.
3 Import the WSDL to the external system using one of the following utilities:
In VisualStudio.Net, use the wsdl.exe utility, for example, wsdl.exe /l:CS mywsdlfile.wsdl.
In Apaches AXIS, use the wsdl2java utility, for example, java

org.apache.axis.wsdl.WSDL2Java mywsdlfile.wsdl.
In IBMs WSADIE, depending on the version, add the WSDL file to the Services perspective
and run the Create Service Proxy wizard.
In Oracle JDeveloper, use the Java Web Service from WSDL wizard.
NOTE: These utilities only generate proxy classes. Developers are responsible for writing code
that uses the proxy classes.
About Defining the Web Service Inbound Dispatcher

The Web Service Inbound Dispatcher is a business service that is called by an inbound transport
server component (or an outbound Web service dispatcher locally). This business service analyzes
input SOAP containing XML data, converts the XML data to business service method arguments, and
invokes the appropriate method for the appropriate service (business service or process). After the
called method finishes its execution, the Web Service Inbound Dispatcher converts the output
arguments to XML data, and returns the XML embedded in the SOAP envelope. During this process,
any errors are returned as SOAP fault messages.
SOAP Fault Message Example

When the code within a Web service raises an exception anywhere in the Web services stack, the
exception is caught and transformed into a SOAP fault message.
For instance, the following example illustrates a particular case where mustUnderstand has been set
to 1; and therefore, the header is interpreted as being mandatory. However, the corresponding filter
and handler to process the header was not defined. This causes a SOAP fault message to be returned.
The format of the Siebel SOAP fault message for this example follows:

Web Services Consuming External Web Services Using Siebel Web Services
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>

- <SOAP-ENV:Envelope xmlns:SOAP-ENV="http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/envelope/">
- <SOAP-ENV:Body>
- <SOAP-ENV:Fault>
<faultcode>SOAP-ENV:MustUnderstand</faultcode>
<faultstring>Unable to process SOAP Header child element
'newns:AnotherUselessHeader' with 'mustUnderstand="1"'(SBL-EAI-08000)
</faultstring>
- <detail>
- <siebelf:errorstack xmlns:siebelf="http://www.siebel.com/ws/fault">
- <siebelf:error>
<siebelf:errorsymbol />
<siebelf:errormsg>Unable to process SOAP Header child element
'newns:AnotherUselessHeader' with 'mustUnderstand="1"'(SBL-EAI-08000)
</siebelf:errormsg>
</siebelf:error>
</siebelf:errorstack>
</detail>
</SOAP-ENV:Fault>
</SOAP-ENV:Body>
</SOAP-ENV:Envelope>
Consuming External Web Services Using

Siebel Web Services
An outbound Web service acts as a proxy to a Web service published by an external application. This
process creates services that you can then use in a business process, virtual business component
(VBC), run-time event, or any other mechanism within the Siebel application that can invoke a
business service.
Consumption of external Web services is a two-step process:
A WSDL file is imported using Siebel Tools.
The consumed Web service is published for run-time clients to use.
Additional steps can involve defining VBCs based on the Web service.
Creating an Outbound Web Service Based on a WSDL

File
Consumption of external Web services is accomplished using the WSDL Import Wizard in Siebel Tools.
The following procedure describes how to use this wizard to read an external WSDL document.
Data and methods for an outbound Web service can be defined by either:
A WDSL file for the external Web service
An outbound ASI

To create an outbound Web service based on a WSDL file

1 In Siebel Tools, create a new project and lock the project, or lock an existing project.
3 Click the EAI tab, and then double-click Web Service.
The WSDL Import Wizard appears.
a Select the project where you want the objects to be held after they are created from the WSDL
document.
b Specify the WSDL document that contains the Web service or Web services definition that you
want to import.
c Specify the file where you want to store the run-time data extracted from the WSDL document
or accept the default.
d Specify the log file where you want errors, warnings, and other information related to the import
process to be logged or accept the default.
4 Click Next.
A summary of your import information, as well as any errors, appears.
5 (Optional) Select the Deploy the Integration Object(s) and the Proxy Business Service(s)
checkbox to deploy these objects to the Siebel run-time database.
Deployed integration objects are shown in the Administration - Web Services > Deployed
Integration Objects view in the Siebel client. Deployed business services are shown in the
Administration - Business Services screen in the Siebel client.
NOTE: If you deploy integration objects while the Siebel Server is running, you must
subsequently clear the Web services cache in the Administration - Web Services > Inbound (or
Outbound) Web Services view.
6 Click Finish to complete the process of importing the business service into the Siebel repository.

This procedure generates three objects in the Siebel repository:
An outbound proxy business service of CSSWSOutboundDispatcher class. This service acts as a

client-side implementation of the Web service and includes the operations and the arguments to
the operations defined in the WSDL document.
NOTE: For RPC services, the order of input arguments is important. You can set the order
through the Preferred Sequence property of the business service method argument in Siebel
Tools. By specifying this parameter, the outbound dispatcher makes sure that the sequence
parameters for an operation are in the correct order. The Preferred Sequence property is only
supported with outbound services.
Integration objects, representing input and output parameters of the service methods, if any of
the operations require a complex argument (XML Schema) to be passed. If the service does not
use complex arguments, then no integration object definitions will be created.
A Web service administration document (XML file) containing the run-time Web service
administration data that should be imported into the Siebel Web Client, using the Outbound Web
Services view of the Administration - Web Services screen.
The purpose of the document is to allow administrators to modify run-time parameters such as
the URL and encoding rules. The data contained within the document is used by the Web Services
Dispatcher to assemble the SOAP document, to set any HTTP headers required (for example,
soapAction), and to route the request to the correct URL. For information, see To import run-
time data about external Web services on page 88.
Outbound Web Services Administration

The WSDL Import Wizard exports the data to a file that you must import to the run-time database
(the Web services address) using the Outbound Web Services view.
To import run-time data about external Web services

1 Restart the Siebel Server (or Siebel Mobile Web Client) with a recompiled version of the SRF file
that includes the new objects created by the Web Services Import Wizard.
NOTE: You do not need to update your SRF file at design time. However, the service definition
must exist in the SRF file during run time.
2 Navigate to Administration - Web Services > Outbound Web Services.
3 In the Outbound Web Services list applet, click Import to bring up the EAI Web Service Import
dialog box.
4 Specify the export file created by the Web Services Import Wizard.
5 Click Import to import the Web service definition into the database.
WSDL does not provide native bindings for EAI MQSeries and EAI MSMQ transports. If your business
requires you to pick up messages using these transports, you can manually create an outbound Web
service definition and update a corresponding business service in Siebel Tools to point to that Web
service. The following procedure describes this process.

To manually create a new outbound Web service

1 Navigate to Administration - Web Services > Outbound Web Services.
2 In the Outbound Web Services list applet, create a new record:
a Enter the namespace of the Web service in the Namespace column.
b Enter the name of the Web service in the Name column.
c Select Active or Inactive in the Status field.
d Enter a description of the Web service in the Comment column.
NOTE: When importing an external Web service, you do not need to specify the proxy
business service, integration objects, or the run-time parameters.
3 In the Service Ports list applet, create a new outbound service ports record:
a Enter the name of the Web service port in the Name column.
b Select a transport name for the protocol or queuing system for the Transport.
4 Enter the address for the transport chosen to publish the Web service:
The URL format to publish using HTTP is:
http://webserver/eai_anon_lang/
start.swe?SWEExtSource=SecureWebService&SWEExtCmd=Execute
where:
webserver = machine name of the Siebel Web Server

lang = default language of the Object Manager to handle the request
The format to publish using JMS transport is:
jms://queue name@connection factory
where:
queue name = Java Naming and Directory Interface (JNDI) name of the queue
connection factory = JNDI name of the JMS connection factory
NOTE: The JNDI name varies depending upon the JMS provider and your implementation.
For the Local Web Service transport, enter the name of the inbound port.
The format to publish over EAI MQSeries or EAI MSMQ transports is:
mq://queue name@queue manager name

msmq://queue name@queue machine name
where:
queue name = name of the queue that is specified by either the EAI MQ Series or the EAI
MSMQ transport at the time of its design
queue manager name = name of the EAI MQSeries Transport queue manager
queue machine name = name of the machine that owns the queue specified by the physical
queue name for the EAI MSMQ Transport
NOTE: When publishing using EAI MQSeries or EAI MSMQ, you cannot generate WSDL files.
For the Local Workflow or the Local Business Service transport, enter the name of a Business
Process or Business Service that should be called.
5 Select the binding that will publish the Web service.
NOTE: RPC_Encoded, RPC_Literal, DOC_Literal, and Property Set styles of binding are
supported for publishing Web services.
Use the Property Set binding when the input property set to the proxy service is forwarded
without changes to the destination address. This is intended primarily for use in combination
with the Local Workflow or Local Business Service transport to avoid the overhead of
processing XML.
6 Enter a description of the port in the Comment column.
7 In the Operations list applet, create a new operation record for the new service port you created
in Step 3 on page 89:
a Select the name of the business service method in the Method Display Name column to complete
the process.
b Select the authentication type from the drop-down list.
NOTE: For more information on using the Username/Password Authentication Type, see
About Web Services Security Support on page 98.
8 Generate the WSDL file. For information, see To generate a WSDL file on page 85.
When you have created your outbound Web service, update a corresponding outbound proxy
business service in Siebel Tools to point to that Web service. This associates the outbound proxy
business service and the outbound Web service. The following procedure outlines the steps you take
to accomplish this task.
To update an outbound Web service proxy business service to point to an outbound

Web service
1 In Siebel Tools, select the outbound Web service proxy business service you want to use to call
your outbound Web service.
2 Add the following user properties for this business service and set their values based on the
outbound service port of your Web service:
siebel_port_name

siebel_web_service_name
siebel_web_service_namespace
Integration Objects as Input Arguments to Outbound

Web Services
The property set that is used as an input argument to the outbound Web service should have the
same name as the input argument's outbound Web service proxy.
You can do this using one of the following options:
Change the output from all your business services that provide the input to the outbound Web
service from SiebelMessage to the actual outbound Web service argument name specified in
Siebel Tools.
Change the output from your business services in Siebel Tools, as well as the name of the
property set child that contains the integration object instance.
Change the property set name from SiebelMessage to the actual outbound Web service argument
name by using a Siebel eScript service before calling the outbound Web service.
Web Services Support for Transport Headers

The outbound Web service dispatcher supports input arguments for user-defined (or standard)
transport headers.
The following is the format for the outbound Web service dispatcher input arguments:
Name: siebel_transport_header:headerName
Value: Header value
The following are examples of input arguments:
Name: siebel_transport_header:UserDefinedHeader
Value: myData
Name: siebel_transport_header:Authorization
Value: 0135DFDJKLJ

Web Services About the Local Business Service
About the Local Business Service

In many instances, Web services use specialized SOAP headers for common tasks such as
authentication, authorization, and logging. In order to support this common Web service extensibility
mechanism, a Local Business Service, as a transport option for outbound Web services, is supported
in the Siebel application. When specified as a transport, the Web services infrastructure will route
the message to the specified business service for additional processing and delivery to the Web
service endpoint as shown in the top half of Figure 23.
Figure 23. Local Business Service Used as a Transport
If the Web service to be invoked is within the sample application, then no need exists to invoke such
a Web service by using HTTP (or anything else).
An example of using a local business service is a department store developing a workflow in Siebel
Tools to perform credit card checks before purchases. The purchase is entered into the sales register
along with the credit card information (the outbound Web service proxy). If the credit card is issued
by the department store, the information can be checked using the internal database (a local
business service). The send request stays within the department stores own computer network. An
approval or denial is the output (the Web service endpoint). If the credit card is a MasterCard or a
Visa card, the card information is passed through the Internet for verification. No local business
service would be involved.
The input to the local business service is a property set representation of the SOAP request. Once
within the local business service, additional SOAP headers may be added to address infrastructure
requirements by direct modification of the input property, set by using Siebel eScript or Siebel VB.
About XML Schema Support for the

<xsd:any> Tag
In the current framework, WSDL Import Wizard makes use of the XML Schema Import Wizard to
create integration objects to represent hierarchical data. Integration objects are meant to be strongly
typed in the Siebel application. You are now able to import a schema that uses the <xsd:any> tag,
which indicates a weakly typed data representation, and to possibly create an integration object from
it.

Web Services About XML Schema Support for the <xsd:any> Tag
Mapping the <xsd:any> Tag in the WSDL Import Wizard

In the WSDL Import Wizard, two possible mappings exist for the <xsd:any> tag. The tag can be
mapped as an integration component or as an XMLHierarchy on the business service method
argument.
The <xsd:any> tag can contain an attribute called namespace. If the value for that attribute is
known, then one or more integration components or even an integration object can be created. If
the value for that attribute is not known, then the business service method argument for that
particular <wsdl:part> tag is changed to data type Hierarchy, consequently losing any type
information.
The value for the attribute being known refers to the following situations:
A schema of targetNamespace value, being the same as that of the namespace attribute value,
is imported by way of the <xsd:import> tag.
A schema of targetNamespace value, being the same as that of the namespace attribute value,
is a child of the <wsdl:types> tag.
For the case of being known, all the global elements belonging to the particular schema of that
targetNamespace will be added in place of the tag. One or more integration components can
potentially be created.
Another tag similar to the <xsd:any> tag is the <xsd:anyAttribute> tag. The mapping is similar to
that of the <xsd:any> tag. In this case, one or more integration component fields can be created.
The <xsd:anyAttribute> tag has an attribute called namespace. If the namespace value is known
(the conditions for being known were noted in this section), then all the global attributes for that
particular schema will be added in place of this tag. Therefore, one or more integration component
fields can potentially be created.
In the case where the namespace value is not known, then the <wsdl:part> tag that is referring to
the schema element and type will be created as data type Hierarchy.
Mapping the <xsd:any> Tag in the XML Schema Wizard

For the case of the XML Schema Wizard, there is only one possible mapping for the <xsd:any> tag,
namely as an integration component.
The <xsd:any> tag can contain an attribute called namespace. If the value for that attribute is
known, then one or more integration components or even an integration object can be created. If
the value for that attribute is not known, an error will be returned to the user saying that the
integration object cannot be created for a weakly typed schema.
The value for the attribute being known refers to the situation of the XML Schema Wizard where a
schema of targetNamespace value, being the same as that of the namespace value, has been
imported by way of the <xsd:import> tag.
For the case of being known, all the global elements belonging to the particular schema of that
targetNamespace will be added in place of the tag. So, one or more integration components can
potentially be created.

Web Services Examples of Invoking Web Services
The mapping of the <xsd:anyAttribute> is similar to that of the <xsd:any> tag. In this case, one or
more integration component fields can be created.
The <xsd:anyAttribute> tag has an attribute called namespace. If the namespace value is known
(the condition for being known was noted in this section), then all the global attributes for that
particular schema will be added in place of this tag. Therefore, one or more integration component
fields can potentially be created.
In the case where the namespace value is not known, then an error is returned to the user stating
that an integration object cannot be created for a weakly typed schema.
Examples of Invoking Web Services

The following two examples show sample flows of how to invoke an external Web service from a
Siebel application, or how to invoke a Siebel Web service from an external application.
Invoking an External Web Service Using Workflow or Scripting

As illustrated on Figure 24 on page 95, the following steps are executed to invoke an external Web
service:
1 The developer obtains the Web service description as a WSDL file.
2 The WSDL Import Wizard is invoked.
3 The WSDL Import Wizard generates definitions for outbound proxy, integration objects for
complex parts, and administration entries.
4 The Outbound Web Service proxy is called with request property set.
5 The request is converted to an outbound SOAP request and sent to the external application.
6 The external application returns a SOAP response.

7 The SOAP response is converted to a property set that can be processed by the callerfor
example, Calling Function.
Figure 24. Invoking an External Web Service
The following example shows how to invoke Web services using Siebel eScript:
function Service_PreCanInvokeMethod (MethodName, &CanInvoke) {

if (MethodName == "invoke") {
CanInvoke = "TRUE";
}
else
}
function Service_PreInvokeMethod (MethodName, Inputs, Outputs) {

if (MethodName == "invoke") {

var svc = TheApplication().GetService("CustomerDBClientSimpleSoap");

var wsInput = TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
var wsOutput = TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
var getCustInput = TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
var listOfGetCustomerName = TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
var getCustomerName = TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
try {
// obtain the customer ID to query on. This value will be provided in the input property set
var custId = Inputs.GetProperty("custId");
// set property to query for a customer ID with a value of '1'

getCustomerName.SetType("getCustomerName");
getCustomerName.SetProperty("custid", custId);
// set Type for listOfGetCustomerName

listOfGetCustomerName.SetType("ListOfgetCustomerName");
// set Type for getCustInput

getCustInput.SetType("getCustomerNameSoapIn:parameters");
// assemble input property set for the service.

listOfGetCustomerName.AddChild(getCustomerName);
getCustInput.AddChild(listOfGetCustomerName);
wsInput.AddChild(getCustInput);
// invoke the getCustomerName operation

svc.InvokeMethod("getCustomerName", wsInput, wsOutput);
// parse the output to obtain the customer full name check the type element on each PropertySet
(parent/child) to make sure we are at the element to obtain the customer name
if (wsOutput.GetChildCount() > 0) {
var getCustOutput = wsOutput.GetChild(0);
if (getCustOutput.GetType() == "getCustomerNameSoapOut:parameters") {
if (getCustOutput.GetChildCount() > 0) {
var outputListOfNames = getCustOutput.GetChild(0);
if (outputListOfNames.GetType() == "ListOfgetCustomerNameResponse") {
if (outputListOfNames.GetChildCount() > 0) {
var outputCustName = outputListOfNames.GetChild(0);
if (outputCustName.GetType() == "getCustomerNameResponse") {
var custName = outputCustName.GetProperty("getCustomerNameResult");
Outputs.SetProperty("customerName", custName);
}
}
}
}
}
}
}
catch (e) {
TheApplication().RaiseErrorText(e);
}
}
else
}
Invoking a Siebel Web Service from an External Application

As illustrated in Figure 25 on page 97, the following steps are executed to invoke a Siebel Web service
from an external application:
1 The WSDL document for an active Web service is published in the Siebel Inbound Web Services
view. To allow processing of the Web service requests, the developer has to make sure:

a The Web Server and the Siebel Server are up and running.
b The appropriate setup is done in the Siebel Server.
2 In the external application, the WSDL document is imported to create a proxy that can be used
to call the Siebel Web service from Step 1.
3 The external application sends the SOAP request into the Siebel application.
4 The Web Service Inbound Dispatcher converts the SOAP request to a property set. Depending on
the inbound Web service configuration, the property set is passed to a business service or a
business process.
5 The property set is returned from the business service or business process to the Web Service
Inbound Dispatcher.
6 Response is converted to a SOAP message and sent back to the calling external application.
Figure 25. Invoking a Siebel Web Service
The following is an example of invoking a Siebel-published Web service using .NET.
// Removed using declaration
namespace sieOppClnt {

Web Services About Web Services Security Support
public class sieOppClnt : System.Web.Services.WebService {

public siebOptyClnt() {
InitializeComponent();
}
// WEB SERVICE CLIENT EXAMPLE
/* The optyQBE returns a list of opty based upon the required input params. Because
the input to the Siebelopty.QueryByExample method uses an Input/Output param,
ListOfInterOptyIntfaceTopElmt will be passed by ref to Siebel. To add the Siebel
Opportunity Web Service definition to the project, the wsdl.exe utility was run
to generate the necessary helper C# class for the service definition. */
[WebMethod]
public ListOfInterOptyIntfaceTopElmt optyQBE(string acctName, string acctLoc,
string salesStage) {
Siebelopty svc = new Siebelopty();
ListOfInterOptyIntfaceTopElmt siebelMessage = new
ListOfInterOptyIntfaceTopElmt();
ListOfInteroptyInterface optyList = new ListOfInteroptyInterface();
opty[] opty = new opty[1];
opty[0] = new opty();
opty[0].Account = acctName;
opty[0].AccountLocation = acctLoc;
opty[0].SalesStage = salesStage;
/* Assemble input to be provided to the Siebel Web service. For the sake of
simplicity the client will query on the Account Name, Location, and Sales
Stage. Ideally, also check to make sure that correct data is entered. */
optyList.opty = opty;
siebelMessage.ListOfInteroptyInterface = optyList;
// Invoke the QBE method of the Siebel Opportunity business service
svc.SiebeloptyQBE(ref siebelMessage);
/* Return the raw XML of the result set returned by Siebel. Additional
processing could be done to parse the response. */
return siebelMessage;
}
About Web Services Security Support

Oracle endorses the industry standard known as the Web Services Security (WS-Security)
specification. The WS-Security specification is a Web services standard that supports, integrates, and
unifies multiple security models and technologies, allowing a variety of systems to interoperate in a
platform- and language-independent environment.

By conforming to industry standard Web service and security specifications, secure cross-enterprise
business processes is supported. You can deploy standards-based technology solutions to solve
specific business integration problems.
For security support, you can also apply access control to business services and workflows. For more
information on configuring access control, see Siebel Security Guide.
Configuring the Siebel Application to Use the

WS-Security Specification
To use the WS-Security specification in the Siebel application, two parameters, UseAnonPool and
Impersonate, must be set. An example of configuring WS Security for Siebel inbound Web services
follows.
To configure the Siebel application to use the WS-Security specification

1 Set the UseAnonPool parameter in the eapps.cfg (SWE plug-in) file under [/eai_anon_enu] as
follows:
UseAnonPool = TRUE
2 Start the Siebel Server.
3 Navigate to Administration - Server Configuration > Enterprises > Profile Configuration.
4 In the Profile Configuration list, query the Alias field for SecureWebService.
5 Make sure that the SecureWebService profile (named subsystem) has parameters with the
following values:
Parameter Alias Value

Service Method to Execute DispatchMethod Dispatch
Service to Execute DispatchService Web Service Inbound Dispatcher
Impersonate Impersonate True
6 When the client makes a call to the Web service, make sure that SWEExtSource points to the
correct virtual directory and named subsystem, for example:
http://myserver/eai_anon_enu/start.swe?SWEExtCmd=Execute
&SWEExtSource=SecureWebService&UserName=user&Password=pass

About WS-Security UserName Token Profile Support

The Siebel applications support the WS-Security UserName Token mechanism, which allows for the
sending and receiving of user credentials in a standards-compliant manner. The UserName token is
a mechanism for providing credentials to a Web service where the credentials consist of the
UserName and Password. The password must be passed in clear text. The UserName token
mechanism provides a Web service with the ability to operate without having the username and
password in its URL or having to pass a session cookie with the HTTP request.
The following is a sample of the UserName token showing the username and password:
<wsse:Security xmlns:wsse="http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/ws/2002/07/secext">
http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/ws/2002/07/secext
<wsse:UsernameToken xmlns:wsu="http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/ws/2002/07/utility">
<wsse:Username>WKANDINSKY</wsse:Username>
<wsse:Password Type="wsse:PasswordText">AbstractArt123</wsse:Password>
</wsse:UsernameToken>
</wsse:Security>
About Support for the UserName Token Mechanism

The support for the UserName Token mechanism includes the following:
Allows an inbound SOAP request to contain user credentials that can be provided to the inbound
SOAP dispatcher to perform the necessary authentication
Allows an inbound SOAP dispatcher to perform the necessary authentication on an inbound SOAP
request that contains user credentials
Allows an outbound SOAP request to contain user credentials that can be utilized by the external
application
The following is an example of passing the user name and password by way of a URL:
http://webserver/eai_enu/start.swe?SWEExtSource=WebService&SWEExtCmd=Execute&
Username=SADMIN&Password=SADMIN
With UserName tokens, the URL does not reveal the user credentials:
http://webserver/eai_anon_enu/
start.swe?SWEExtSource=SecureWebService&SWEExtCmd=Execute
NOTE: Using WS-Security is optional. If security is of the utmost importance, and if it is critical that
the password not be provided in clear text, use HTTPS.

Using the UserName Token for Inbound Web Services

The Inbound Web Services view provides an interface for associating operations with authentication
types. The names of the operations need to be globally unique. The applet shown in Figure 26 can
be defined as requiring no authentication, or requiring a UserName Token with username and
password provided in clear text.
Figure 26. Inbound Web Services View and the UserName Token
NOTE: No authentication type implies that the user credentials are in the URL.
Using the UserName Token for Outbound Web Services

Each Web service operation in the Outbound Web Services list applet may be tied to an authentication
type by selecting from the Authentication Type picklist (see Figure 27) in the Operations picklist, in
the following applet.
Figure 27. Outbound Web Services List Applet and the Operations PickList
Integration Platform Technologies: Siebel Enterprise Application 10 1

Web Services About Siebel Authentication and Session Management SOAP Headers
About Siebel Authentication and Session

Management SOAP Headers
You can use Siebel Authentication and Session Management SOAP headers to send and receive user
credentials and session information. You can send a username and password for login that invokes
one of the following sessions:
One that closes after the outbound response is sent.
One that remains open after the response is sent.
For example, a custom Web application can send a request that includes a username and password,
and invokes a stateless session, one that remains open after the outbound response is sent. The
Siebel Server generates an encrypted session token that contains user credentials and a session ID.
The Siebel Server includes the session token in the SOAP header of the outbound response. The client
application is responsible for capturing the returned session token and including it in the SOAP
header of the next request.
The Session Manager on the Siebel Web Server Extension (SWSE) extracts the user credentials and
session ID from the session token and reconnects to the session on the Siebel Server. If the original
session has been closed, a new session is created.

You can use the SOAP headers listed in Table 7 to invoke different types of sessions and pass
authentication credentials.
NOTE: The values entered are case insensitive.
Table 7. Siebel Session Management and Authentication SOAP Headers
SOAP Header
Block Description
SessionType You use the SessionType SOAP header to define the type of session. Valid
values are None, Stateless, Stateful, and ServerDetermine:
None. A new session is opened for each request and then closed after a
response is sent out. The SessionType none may or may not include
UsernameToken and PasswordText SOAP headers. When UsernameToken
and PasswordText SOAP headers are included, these credentials are used
for authentication.
If the UsernameToken and PasswordText SOAP headers are excluded from

the SOAP header, anonymous login is assumed. The anonymous login
requires additional configuration in the Siebel Web Engine (eapps.cfg) and
Named Subsystem configuration (AllowAnonymous).
For more information about configuring Anonymous login, see Siebel

Security Guide.
Stateless. A new session is opened for an initial request and the session
remains open for subsequent requests. Relogin occurs automatically
(transparent to the user) if the session is closed. UsernameToken and
PasswordText must be included as SOAP headers in the initial request to
open a stateless session.
Stateful. A new, dedicated session is opened for an initial request and the
session remains open for subsequent requests. Relogin does not occur
automatically if the session is closed. UsernameToken and PasswordText
must be included as SOAP headers in the initial request to open a stateful
session.
ServerDetermine. A new session is established to Siebel, and a series of

subsequent requests is served. The Siebel Server is free to multiplex the
session to serve other users if possible, but the client is free to make
stateful calls to Siebel. Failover is not supported for this mode.
ServerDetermine provides the most flexibility: the session can be dedicated

or not. If the number of users increases and resources need to be
recovered, the session state is written to the database so that it can be
restored. The session can then serve other users.
If SessionType is absent, then the default value is None, and the session will
be closed after the request is processed.
UsernameToken You use the UsernameToken SOAP header to send the Login ID to the Siebel
Server.

Table 7. Siebel Session Management and Authentication SOAP Headers
SOAP Header
Block Description
PasswordText You use the PasswordText SOAP header to send the password used by the login
ID to the Siebel server.
SessionToken Session tokens are used with stateless requests. They are sent and received
using the SessionToken SOAP header. After receiving an initial request with
valid authentication credentials and a session type set to Stateless, the Siebel
Server generates a session token and includes it in the SOAP header of the
outbound response. The session token is encrypted and consists of a session
ID and user credentials. The custom Web application uses the session token for
subsequent requests. The Session Manager on the SWSE extracts a session ID
and user credentials from the session token, and then passes the information
to the Siebel Server. The session ID is used to reconnect to an existing session
or automatically log in again if the session has been terminated.
For examples of using SOAP headers for session management and authentication, see Examples of
Using SOAP Headers for Authentication and Session Management on page 106.
The namespace used with Siebel Authentication and Session Management SOAP headers is:
xmlns="http://siebel.com/webservices"
NOTE: The Siebel Session Management and Authentication SOAP headers are different from the
SOAP headers used for WS-Security. Do not use the two types of header together. For more
information about WS-Security, see About WS-Security UserName Token Profile Support on page 100.

Combinations of Session Types and Authentication

Types
Table 8 summarizes the combinations of authentication types and session types.
Table 8. Summary of Authentication Types and Session Types
Authentication Type Session Type Description
None None A single request is sent with an anonymous

user login, and the session is closed after the
response is sent out.
In order for the anonymous session to be

identified by the SWSE Plug-in,
UsernameToken and PasswordText need to be
excluded in the SOAP headers.
Username and password None A single request is sent with the username and
password used to log in, and the session is
closed after the response is sent out.
Username and password Stateless The initial request to log in establishes a

session that is to remain open and available
for subsequent requests. Username/password
are used to log in and a session token is
returned in a SOAP header included in the
outbound response. The session remains
open.
Session token (stateless) Stateless Request to reconnect to an established

session, using the information contained in
the session token. If the session has been
closed, automatic relogin occurs. The Siebel
servers include the session token in the SOAP
header of the response. The session remains
open.
Session token (stateless) None When a SOAP header carries a session token
and has the session type set to None, then the
Session Manager on the SWSE closes (logs
out) of this session, and invalidates the
session token. The session token is not used
after the session is invalidated.
For examples that illustrate some of these combinations, see Examples of Using SOAP Headers for
Authentication and Session Management on page 106.

Enabling Session Management on SWSE

To enable Session Management on the Siebel Web Server Extension (SWSE) for SOAP header
handling, the Web service request must include the following URL parameter: WSSOAP=1. For
example:
http://mywebserver/EAIObjMgr_enu/
start.swe?SWEExtSource=CustomUI&SWEExtCmd=Execute&WSSOAP=1
NOTE: When using Siebel Session Management and Authentication SOAP headers, then the WS-
Security authentication types for all Web service operations must be set to None. You set the WS-
Security authentication types in the Operations applets of the Inbound Web Services or Outbound
Web Services views in the Administration-Web Services screen. For more information about WS-
Security, see About WS-Security UserName Token Profile Support on page 100.
Session Timeout and Max Age Parameters

You control the session timeout length and maximum age by setting the parameters listed in Table 9.
These parameters are set in the eapps.cfg file, which is located in the SWEAPP_ROOT\bin directory,
where SWEAPP_ROOT is the directory in which you installed the SWSE.
Table 9. Session Token TimeOut and MaxAge Parameters
Parameter Name Parameter Value Description
SessionTokenTimeout Number in minutes Number of minutes a session can remain

inactive before the user is logged out
and the session is closed.
SessionTokenMaxAge Number in minutes The total number of minutes a session

can remain open before the user is
logged out and the session is closed.
Examples of Using SOAP Headers for Authentication and

Session Management
The following examples illustrate using Siebel Authentication and Session Management SOAP
headers. These examples use various authentication and session type combinations. For more
information, see Combinations of Session Types and Authentication Types on page 105.
Anonymous Request No Session

This example illustrates an anonymous request and a session type of None, which closes the session
after the response is sent out:
<soap:Envelope xmlns:soap="http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/envelope/">
<soap:Header>
<SessionType xmlns="http://siebel.com/webservices">None</SessionType>

</soap:Header>
<soap:Body>

</soap:Body>
</soap:Envelope>
Siebel Authorization No Session

This example illustrates a request that includes authentication credentials (username and password)
and a session type of None, which closes the session after the response is sent out:
<soap:Header>
<UsernameToken xmlns="http://siebel.com/webservices">user</UsernameToken>
<PasswordText xmlns="http://siebel.com/webservices">hello123</PasswordText>
<SessionType xmlns="http://siebel.com/webservices">None</SessionType>
</soap:Header>
<soap:Body>
</soap:Body>
</soap:Envelope>
Siebel Authorization Stateless Session

The following examples illustrate a request, response, and subsequent request for a session type set
to Stateless, which keeps the session open after the initial response is sent out.
Initial Request
This example illustrates the initial request that includes authentication credentials (username and
password) needed to login:
<soap:Header>
<UsernameToken xmlns="http://siebel.com/webservices">user</UsernameToken>
<PasswordText xmlns="http://siebel.com/webservices">hello123</PasswordText>
<SessionType xmlns="http://siebel.com/webservices">Stateless</SessionType>
</soap:Header>
<soap:Body>
</soap:Body>
</soap:Envelope>
Response
This example illustrates the session token (encrypted) generated by the Siebel Server and sent back
in the SOAP header of the response:
<soap:Header>
<siebel-header:SessionToken xmlns:siebel-header="http://siebel.com/
webservices">2-r-JCunnMN9SxI9Any9zGQTOFIuJEJfCXjfI0G-
9ZOOH4lJjbSd2P.G7vySzo07sFeJxUA0WhdnK_</siebel-header:SessionToken>

</soap:Header>
<soap:Body>
</soap:Body>
</soap:Envelope>
Subsequent Request Using Session Token

This example illustrates a subsequent request that includes the session token (encrypted) that was
generated by the Siebel Server and passed in a previous response. The session token includes the
user credentials and session information needed to reconnect to an existing session, or log in to a
new one if the initial session has been closed:
<soap:Header>
<SessionType xmlns="http://siebel.com/webservices">Stateless</SessionType>
<SessionToken xmlns="http://siebel.com/webservices">2-r-
JCunnMN9SxI9Any9zGQTOFIuJEJfCXjfI0G-9ZOOH4lJjbSd2P.G7vySzo07sFeJxUA0WhdnK_</
SessionToken>
</soap:Header>
<soap:Body>
</soap:Body>
</soap:Envelope>
Simple Query Starting With <soap:body>

This example illustrates data for a simple query starting with the <soap:body> element:
<soap:body>
<Account_spcService_Account_spcServiceQueryPage_Input
xmlns="http://siebel.com/CustomUI">
<ListOfTestAccount
xmlns="http://www.siebel.com/xml/Test%20Account/Query">
<Account>
<Name>A*</Name>
</Account>
</ListOfTestAccount>
</Account_spcService_Account_spcServiceQueryPage_Input>
</soap:body>

Web Services About Web Services and Web Single Sign-On Authentication
About Web Services and Web Single

Sign-On Authentication
Siebel Web services support Web single sign-on deployment scenarios in which third-party
applications handle authentication, and then pass authentication information to the Siebel
application. When the third-party application authenticates it, users do not have to explicitly log in
to the Siebel application. Figure 28 illustrates a Web single sign-on deployment scenario using Siebel
Web services. For more information about Web single sign-on, see Siebel Security Guide.
Figure 28. Web Single Sign-On Scenario
Each component in the SSO Scenario shown in Figure 28 is described below:
SSO Access Manager. SSO Access Manager, configured in front of the Java EE server,
challenges user login, authenticates user credentials with LDAP, and sets a security token in the
browser (http header), which gets forwarded to the Java EE server.
Java EE Server. This server extracts user credentials from the security token in the request.
The Session Manager Login method takes the request as an argument and forwards it to the
SWSE. The request contains the security token in the header.
SWSE. SWSE extracts the user credentials from the security token and sends user credentials
and the trust token to the Siebel Server.
Siebel Server. The Siebel Server validates user credentials with LDAP and validates the trust
token with security settings.
About Passing Localization Information

in SOAP Headers
When external applications, such as Siebel Self-Service Applications, interact with Siebel Business
Applications through Web services, they pass user credentials to Siebel Business Applications in the
SOAP header. In version 8.1, external applications can also pass localization information in the SOAP
header, such as the following:

Web Services About Custom SOAP Filters
Language
Locale
Currency
Time zone
This information is stored in the users session by the Siebel Server, and any subsequent requests
will return data that is localized, for example in German with monetary amounts in euros and the
time in Central European Time.
The following example shows a SOAP header, sent from one of the Siebel Self-Service Applications,
with localization parameters:
<env:Envelope xmlns:env="http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/envelope/"
xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/
XMLSchema-instance" xmlns:ns0="http://siebel.com/SelfService/Common/Setup"
xmlns:ns1="http://www.siebel.com/SelfService/Common/WebSite/Query"
xmlns:ns2="http://www.siebel.com/SelfService/Common/WebSite/Data"
xmlns:ns3="http://www.siebel.com/SelfService/Common/WebSite/Id">
<env:Header>
...
<sbh:LangCode xmlns:sbh="http://siebel.com/webservices">DEU</sbh:LangCode>
<sbh:Locale xmlns:sbh="http://siebel.com/webservices">DEU</sbh:Locale>
<sbh:CurrencyCode xmlns:sbh="http://siebel.com/webservices">EUR</
sbh:CurrencyCode>
<sbh:TimeZone xmlns:sbh="http://siebel.com/webservices">Central European

Time</sbh:CurrencyCode>
...
</env:Header>
<env:Body>
<ns0:SelfServiceWebSiteQueryPage_Input>
...
</env:Body>
</env:Envelope>
About Custom SOAP Filters

Headers represent SOAP's extensibility mechanism and provide a flexible and standards-based
mechanism of adding additional context to a request or response. Custom SOAP header support
provides a flexible extensibility mechanism when integrating with external Web services, and a
means of providing additional context as required by the Web service implementation.

Handling Custom Headers Using Filters

SOAP headers provide the option of providing optional or mandatory processing information. To
process optional custom headers that are provided by external applications, a special business
service known as a filter may be defined. Filters can process both request and response headers. A
special attribute, mustUnderstand, is used to indicate whether or not the custom header is to be
processed:
If 'mustUnderstand' equals 1, the custom header is interpreted as being mandatory and the
custom header is processed by the filter defined for this purpose.
If 'mustUnderstand' equals 1 and a filter is not specified, the custom header is not read and a
SOAP:MustUnderstand fault is generated.
If 'mustUnderstand' equals 0, no processing of the custom header is attempted.
You want to keep the SOAP body and header processing isolated. The inbound dispatcher and
outbound proxy know how to process the SOAP body, but do not know how to set or consume
headers. Headers are application-specific. Some customization is needed to set and consume custom
headers. To process optional custom headers that are provided by external applications, a special
business service, a filter, is defined. You can configure the Web service outbound proxy and the Web
service inbound dispatcher to call specific filters for the processing of individual (custom) headers.
NOTE: Headers that are consumed by the filter service have to be removed from the SOAP message.
Enabling SOAP Header Processing Through Filters

For each operation, you can set the inbound and outbound filters to be run. You can also define the
methods you want to invoke on the filter.
The following code sample illustrates a filter that has been written for the handling of custom SOAP
headers. The interface provided by this code sample lets you define the method on the filter that you
want to invoke, and also the corresponding input and output parameters.
if(MethodName == "StripHeader") {
if(Inputs.GetChildCount() > 0) {
Outputs.InsertChildAt(Inputs.GetChild(0), 0);
var soapEnv = Outputs.GetChild(0);
if(soapEnv.GetChildCount() == 2) { // headers and body
var callBackHeader = soapHeader.GetChild(0);
if(callBackHeader.GetChildCount() == 2) {
var headerContext = TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
headerContext.SetType("HeaderContext");
// get the header child property set
var callBackLocnHeader = callBackHeader.GetChild(0);
var correlationIdHeader = callBackHeader.GetChild(1);
headerContext.AddChild(callBackLocnHeader);
headerContext.AddChild(correlationIdHeader);
soapHeader.RemoveChild(0);
Outputs.AddChild(headerContext);
}

}
}
}
else if(MethodName == "AddHeader") {
var soapHeader = TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
soapHeader.SetType("soapEnv:Header");
soapHeader.SetProperty("xmlns:soapEnv", "http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/
soap/envelope/");
var correlationIdHeader = TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
correlationIdHeader.SetType("CorrelationId");
if(Inputs.GetChildCount() == 2) {
// get the correlation id from soap header context
var soapHeaderCntxt = Inputs.GetChild(1);
var corIdHeader = soapHeaderCntxt.GetChild(0);
correlationIdHeader.SetValue(corIdHeader.GetValue());
}
else
{
// set default correlation id header
correlationIdHeader.SetValue("30");
}
soapHeader.AddChild(correlationIdHeader);
soapEnv.InsertChildAt(soapHeader, 0);|
}
}
else if(MethodName == "AddPSHeader") {
var soapHeader = TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
soapHeader.SetType("PropertySetHeader");
soapHeader.SetProperty("xmlns:PropertySet", "http://www.siebel.com/
propertyset");
var correlationIdHeader = TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
correlationIdHeader.SetType("CorrelationId");
if(Inputs.GetChildCount() == 2) {
// get the correlation id from soap header context
var corIdHeader = soapHeaderCntxt.GetChild(0);
correlationIdHeader.SetValue(corIdHeader.GetValue());
}
else {
// set default correlation id header
correlationIdHeader.SetValue("30");
}
soapHeader.AddChild(correlationIdHeader);
soapEnv.InsertChildAt(soapHeader, 0);
}

Web Services About Web Services Cache Refresh
Inputting a SOAP Envelope to a Filter Service

Using a SOAP envelope as the input to a filter service is the property set representation of an XML
document. For example, each tag in the XML document is a property set. Each attribute on the tag
is a property in the property set.
To pass the information in the headers further down the stack to the actual business service method
or workflow being invoked the HeaderContext property set is passed to the business service or
workflow that is invoked. For example, on a call to an inbound Web service, if there are a couple of
headers in the SOAP message, the filter service extracts the header information. In order to use it
in the business service or workflow execution call, this information has to be contained in the
HeaderContext. Internally, the Siebel Web services infrastructure passes HeaderContext to the
eventual business service or workflow that is invoked.
About Web Services Cache Refresh

Both Siebel inbound and outbound Web services are typically cached into memory on the Siebel
Server. At times, administrators need to update the definitions of these services to provide more
current or correct functionality. Administrators have the ability to directly refresh the memory cache
in real time, without stopping and restarting Siebel services.
The Web services cache is used to store all the global administration information that can be
manipulated in the Inbound and Outbound Web Service administration views.
The Clear Cache feature requires user interaction. The administrator decides when the Web service
configuration must be refreshed. When used, Web service configuration changes can be made
without restarting the Siebel Server or the Server Component that uses the configuration.
The Clear Cache feature is a button on the Administration - Web Services screen. This feature is
available for inbound and outbound Web services.
Enabling Web Services Tracing

You can enable Web services tracing on the Siebel Server to write all inbound and outbound SOAP
documents to a log file.
To enable Web services tracing

1 Navigate to Administration - Server Configuration > Servers.
The view that appears displays three different list applets. The top applet lists the Siebel Servers
for the enterprise. The middle applet has three tabsComponents, Parameters and Events. The
bottom applet has two tabsEvents and Parameters.
2 In the top list applet, select the Siebel Server that you want to configure.

Web Services Enabling Web Services Tracing
3 In the middle applet, click the Components tab.
This list applet contains the components for the Siebel Server selected in the top applet.
Choose the relevant application object manager.
4 In the bottom applet, click the Parameters tab.
This list applet contains the parameters for the Component selected in the middle applet.
5 Set the Log Level to 4 for any or all of the following Event Types.
Event Type Alias Description Comment
Web Service WebSvcPerf Web Service Used for

Performance Performance Event performance logging
Type
Web Service WebSvcOutboundArgTrc Web Service Used for logging

Outbound Argument Outbound Run-time arguments to the
Tracing Argument Tracing outbound dispatcher
Web Service WebSvcOutbound Web Service Used for run-time

Outbound Outbound Run-time logging of outbound
Event Type Web services
Web Service Loading WebSvcLoad Web Service Used for logging of

Configuration Loading the loading of Web
Event Type services
Web Service Inbound WebSvcInboundArgTrc Web Service Inbound Used for logging
Argument Tracing Run-time Argument arguments to the
Tracing inbound dispatcher
Web Service Inbound WebSvcInbound Web Service Inbound Used for logging at
Run-time Event Type Web service inbound
run time.
Information is
logged to the
inbound dispatcher
Web Service Design WebSvcDesign Web Service Design- Used for logging at
time Event Type Web service design
time. For example,
at the time of WSDL
import and
generation
6 In the middle applet, click the Components tab.
7 Select the EAI Object Manager component, and then click the Parameters tab.
The Component Parameters list appears.
8 Click Advanced to see the advanced parameters. (Click Reset to hide them again.)

9 Query for Enable Business Service Argument Tracing.
10 Set its Value and Value on Restart fields to True.

11 Restart or reconfigure the server component.
For information on restarting server components and on advanced and hidden parameters, see
Siebel System Administration Guide.
About the Cardinality of the Root Integration Components

The cardinality of the root integration component used by inbound Web services must be set to Zero
or More. The cardinality of other integration components is not restricted.
The reason for the constraint on root component cardinality is that the Siebel Web services
infrastructure generally returns multiple instances of the root integration component for any given
request. Thus, having the cardinality set to anything other than Zero or More prevents the external
clients from correctly interoperating with Siebel Web services.
NOTE: When modifying run-time parameters, restart the server component. For information on
restarting server components, see Siebel System Administration Guide.


6 EAI Siebel Adapter Business

Service
EAI Siebel Adapter is a preconfigured business service that is used with any integration process that
runs through the Siebel business object layer. Integration objects are used to update data in business
objects and are used when retrieving data from business objects. These integration objects are
configurable and can be used during an integration process (for example, entering and retrieving
data from the Siebel Business Application).
This chapter describes the functionality of the EAI Siebel Adapter business service, and the different
methods and arguments you can use with it to manipulate the data in the Siebel Database.
The following topics are included:
About the EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service on page 117

EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service Methods on page 118
EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service Method Arguments on page 142
About Multivalue Groups in the EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service on page 145
About Using Language-Independent Code with the EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service on
page 147
Siebel EAI and Run-Time Events on page 148
Best Practices for Using the EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service on page 148
Troubleshooting the EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service on page 149
Enabling Logging for the EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service on page 150
Enabling Siebel Argument Tracing on page 151
Configuring the EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service for Concurrency Control on page 152
About the EAI Siebel Adapter Business

Service
EAI Siebel Adapter is a general-purpose integration business service that allows you to:
Read Siebel business objects from the Siebel Database into integration objects.
NOTE: When called locally, the EAI Siebel Adapter business service creates an additional
database connection.
Write an integration object instance whose data originates externally in a Siebel business object.

EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service Methods
Update multiple corresponding top-level parent business component records with data from one
XML filefor an example, see Update Method on page 131.
NOTE: The Siebel Message is considered to be one transaction. The transaction is committed
when there is no error. If there is an error, the transaction is aborted and rolled back.
Node Types and the EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service

In an integration object hierarchy, nodes with at least one child are called internal nodes and nodes
without children are called leaf nodes. When either the insert or update method is called on the EAI
Siebel Adapter business service, the adapter performs the operation on both internal nodes and leaf
nodes. When the insert or update method is called on the EAI UI Data Adapter business service, the
adapter performs insert on leaf nodes only.
For more information on node types, see About the EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service on
page 157.
EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service

Methods
The EAI Siebel Adapter supports the following methods:
Query Method on page 119
QueryPage Method on page 120
Synchronize Method on page 121
Insert Method on page 129
Upsert Method on page 130
Update Method on page 131
Delete Method on page 131
Execute Method on page 132
About the Examples in the EAI Siebel Adapter Business

Service Methods Sections
The following information is true for the examples used for the EAI Siebel Adapter methods:
The business object data is represented as integration object data in XML format.
The XML document or integration object instance may also be referred to as a Siebel Message.
Fields that contain null values are not included in the XML examples.
However, these fields may be revealed when you use EAI XML Write to File.WriteEAIMsg() to print
out the XML.

Query Method
You can use a combination of input arguments when using the Query Business Service Method of the
EAI Siebel Adapter. The input arguments are as follows:
1 Query By Example (QBE). Pass in an integration object instance represented as a property set.
2 Primary Row Id. Pass in a string to the Object Id input argument. The string can be the row_id
of the primary business component of the Output Integration Object Name.
3 Output Integration Object Name. See the Primary Row Id for information.
4 Search Specification. Pass in a String expression.
The input arguments can be used in one of the following combinations:
2 and 3
3 and 4
2, 3, and 4
The EAI Siebel Adapter uses this input as criteria to query the base business object and to return a
corresponding integration object instance.
For an example of using the search specification method argument to limit the scope of your query
see About Using Language-Independent Code with the EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service on
page 147.
When using the EAI Siebel Adapter, to query all the business component records, you do not need
to specify any value in the Object Id process property of the workflow process. In this case not
specifying an Object Id or a Search Specification works as a wildcard.
If you want to query Siebel data using the EAI Siebel Adapter with the Query method and an
integration object instance (property set) containing a query by example (QBE) search criteria, then
all the fields present in the QBE will be used in the query. To retrieve a unique record, include the
fields that make up the user key for the underlying integration object component instance to ensure
you retrieve a unique record. You can use an asterisk (*) as a wildcard for each one of the fields.
For example, the following is your QBE:
<?xml version = "1.0" encoding = "UTF-8"?>

<?Siebel-Property-Set EscapeNames="false"?>
<SiebelMessage MessageId = "1-2IOY" IntObjectName = "EAI Account" MessageType =
"Integration Object" IntObjectFormat = "Siebel Hierarchical">
<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<CSN>*</CSN>
<HomePage>*</HomePage>
<Location>H*</Location>
<Name>A*</Name>
<Type>*</Type>
</Account>

</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
You would receive all of the Accounts with names that start with A* and have locations that start
with H*. The CSN, HomePage, and Type fields cannot be blank because they are used in the query.
The EAI Siebel Adapter converts the QBE into a user Search Expression of the following:
[CSN] ~ LIKE "*" AND [Home Page] ~ LIKE "*" AND [Location] ~ LIKE "H*" AND [Name] ~
LIKE "A*" AND [Type] ~ LIKE "*"
You can run this example and review the output XML generated.
NOTE: The EAI Siebel Adapter explicitly overrides any Object Manager settings for the
MaxCursorSize parameter. The EAI Siebel Adapter uses a MaxCursorSize of -1. If you want to limit
the number of results received when using the Query method, use the QueryPage Method. You can
combine the Object Id and Search Specification together to query for parent and child data.
NOTE: The EAI Siebel Adapter returns the output of the Query() method as one Siebel Message. This
integration object instance is stored in the process memory. If your query returns a large number of
records, this will result in your Siebel component's memory consumption being high.
QueryPage Method
This method is useful when the search specification retrieves a large number of records at the root
component. To avoid returning one huge Siebel Message, you can specify the number of records to
be returned using the PageSize argument, as presented in Table 21 on page 143. You can also use
method arguments such as OutputIntObjectName, SearchSpec, SortSpec, ViewMode, and
StartRowNum to dictate which records to return.
Even though the QueryPage returns a limited number of records, it keeps the data in the cache, which
you can then retrieve by calling the EAI Siebel Adapter with a new value for the StartRowNum
method argument. Please note that this is only possible if the method arguments
OutputIntObjectName, PageSize, SearchSpec, SortSpec, and ViewMode are not changed and the
NewQuery method argument is set to False.
NOTE: The EAI Siebel Adapter returns the output of the QueryPage() method as one Siebel Message.
This integration object instance is stored in the process memory. If your query returns a large
number of records, this will result in your Siebel component's memory consumption being high.
The following is an example of using the QueryPage() method in a business service.
var EAIService = TheApplication().GetService("EAI Siebel Adapter");

var writeSvc = TheApplication().GetService("EAI XML Write to File");
var EAIin = TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
var ResultSet= TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
var moreRecords = true;
var countOfObjects = 0;
var i = 1;
// set up input arguments, get 10 at a time

EAIin.SetProperty("OutputIntObjectName", "EAI Account");
EAIin.SetProperty("PageSize", "10");

EAIin.SetProperty("SearchSpec", "[Account.Name] LIKE '3*'");

EAIin.SetProperty("StartRowNum", i);
EAIin.SetProperty("NewQuery", "true");
// retrieve the business component data

EAIService.InvokeMethod("QueryPage", EAIin, ResultSet);
// loop through cached data

while ( (ResultSet.GetChildCount() > 0) && (moreRecords)) {
countOfObjects = countOfObjects + ResultSet.GetProperty("NumOutputObjects");
// write out first chunk of dta retrieved

ResultSet.SetProperty("FileName", "d:\\temp\\EAIaccount$$.xml);
writeSvc.InvokeMethod("WriteEAIMsg", ResultSet, Outputs);
// reuse the existing input property set, except don't reissue query
EAIin.SetProperty("NewQuery", "false");
i= i+10; // get next 10 records
EAIin.SetProperty("StartRowNum", i);
ResultSet.Reset(); // clear previous result set

EAIService.InvokeMethod("QueryPage", EAIin, ResultSet);
if (ResultSet.GetProperty("LastPage") == "true")
moreRecords = false;
Synchronize Method
You can use the Synchronize method to make the values in a business object instance match those
of an integration object instance. This operation can result in updates, insertions, or deletions in the
business components. The following rules apply to the results of this method:
If a child component is not present in the integration object instance, the corresponding child
business component rows are left untouched.
If the integration object instances child component has an empty container, then all child records
in the corresponding business component are deleted.
For a particular child component, records that exist in both the integration object instance and
business component are updated. Records that exist in the integration object hierarchy and not
in the business component are inserted. Records in the business component and not in the
integration object instance are deleted.
NOTE: The Synchronize method updates only the fields specified in the integration component
instance.
Example of Synchronize Method on Deleted Unmatched Children

This first example demonstrates deleting unmatched children when using the Synchronize method.
This example uses data present in the sample database.


<SiebelMessage MessageId = "1-2QY5" IntObjectName = "EAI Account" MessageType =
<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<AccountStatus>Active</AccountStatus>
<CSN>1-3JGO7</CSN>
<CurrencyCode>USD</CurrencyCode>
<LanguageCode>ENU</LanguageCode>
<Location>Test</Location>
<Name>ABC Corp</Name>
<ListOfAccount_BusinessAddress>
<Account_BusinessAddress IsPrimaryMVG = "Y">
<AddressActiveStatus>Y</AddressActiveStatus>
<BillAddressFlag>Y</BillAddressFlag>
<City>ATown</City>
<Country>USA</Country>
<MainAddressFlag>Y</MainAddressFlag>
<ShipAddressFlag>Y</ShipAddressFlag>
<StreetAddress>123 Main St</StreetAddress>
</Account_BusinessAddress>
<Account_BusinessAddress IsPrimaryMVG = "N">
<City>BTown</City>
<StreetAddress>456 Oak St</StreetAddress>
</ListOfAccount_BusinessAddress>
<ListOfContact>
<Contact>
<ActiveStatus>Y</ActiveStatus>
<FirstName>User1</FirstName>
<LastName>User1</LastName>
<Organization>Default Organization</Organization>
<ListOfContact_Organization>
<Contact_Organization IsPrimaryMVG = "Y">
<OrganizationIntegrationId/>
</Contact_Organization>
</ListOfContact_Organization>
<ListOfContact_AlternatePhone/>
</Contact>
<Contact>

</Contact>
</ListOfContact>
<ListOfAccount_Organization>
<Account_Organization IsPrimaryMVG = "Y">
<OrganizationId>0-R9NH</OrganizationId>
</Account_Organization>
</ListOfAccount_Organization>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Then the following XML (integration object instance) is submitted with Synchronize:

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<CSN>1-3JGO7</CSN>
<Competitor>Y</Competitor>
<LanguageCode>CHS</LanguageCode>
<Location>test</Location>
<ListOfContact>
<Contact>
<ActiveStatus>N</ActiveStatus>
<MiddleName></MiddleName>
</Contact>
<Contact>
<MiddleName></MiddleName>
</Contact>
</ListOfContact>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>

Following is the result you will receive. Because the contact information is included in the integration
object instance, User2 in the database is deleted because it was an unmatched node. User1 is
updated because it is a matched node. User3 is inserted because it is a new node. Since Business
Address was not included in the integration object instance, it is left in the business object.

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<CSN>1-3JGO7</CSN>
<Location>Test</Location>
<City>ATown</City>
<City>BTown</City>
<ListOfContact>
<Contact>
</Contact>
<Contact>

</Contact>
</ListOfContact>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Table 10 is a high level representation of the previous example.
Table 10. Representation of the Synchronize Method on Deleted Unmatched Children
Integration Object
Record In Database Instance Record After Synchronize
Account: ABC Corp Account: ABC Corp Account: ABC Corp
Business Address: 123 Main St Contact: User1 Business Address: 123 Main St
Business Address: 456 Oak St Contact: User3 Business Address: 456 Oak St
Contact: User1 Contact: User1
Organization: Default Org. Organization: Default Org
Contact: User2 Contact: User3
Organization: Default Org. Organization: Default Org.
Organization: Default Org. Organization: Default Org.
This second example demonstrates how all records with an empty container are deleted when using
the Synchronize method.
If you start with this business component data:

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<CSN>1-3JGO7</CSN>

<AddressId>1-3JGOA</AddressId>
<City>MyTown</City>
<Country>Canada</Country>
<AddressId>1-3JGOB</AddressId>
<City>YourTown</City>
<ListOfContact>
<Contact>
<MiddleName/>
</Contact>
<Contact>
<MiddleName/>
</Contact>
</ListOfContact>

</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
And the following integration object instance is passed in:

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<CSN>1-3JGO7</CSN>
<Competitor>Y</Competitor>
<ListOfContact/>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
After the sync operation, all the children contacts are deleted because none of the nodes match.

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<CSN>1-3JGO7</CSN>
<AddressId>1-3JGOA</AddressId>
<City>MyTown</City>

<AddressId>1-3JGOB</AddressId>
<City>YourTown</City>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Table 11 is a high level representation of the operation.
This second example demonstrates how all records with an empty container are deleted when using
the Synchronize method.
Table 11. Representation of Records with Empty Containers Being Deleted Using Synchronize
Method
Integration Object
Record In Database Instance Record After Synchronize
Account: ABC Corp Account: ABC Corp Account: ABC Corp
Business Address: 123 Main St Contact: Business Address: 123 Main St
Business Address: 456 Oak St Business Address: 456 Oak St
Contact: User1 Organization: Default Org.
Organization: Default Org.
Contact: User2

Insert Method
This method is also similar to the Synchronize method with the exception that the EAI Siebel Adapter
generates an error if a matching root component is found; otherwise, it inserts the root component
and synchronizes all the children. It is important to note that when you insert a record, there is a
possibility that the business component would create default children for the record, which need to
be removed by the Insert method. The Insert method synchronizes the children, which deletes all
the default children. For example, if you insert an account associated with a specific organization, it
will also be automatically associated with a default organization. As part of the Insert method, the
EAI Siebel Adapter deletes the default association, and associates the new account with only the
organization that was originally defined in the input integration object instance. The EAI Siebel
Adapter achieves this by synchronizing the children.
Example of Using the Insert Method

If you use the Insert method with the example of the integration object instance represented in XML
that follows, a new service request is created with two activities.

<SiebelMessage MessageId = "1-2R6E" IntObjectName = "Sample Service Request"
MessageType = "Integration Object" IntObjectFormat = "Siebel Hierarchical">
<ListOfSampleServiceRequest>
<ServiceRequest>
<Account>Genesys Communications</Account>
<AccountLocation>San Francisco, CA</AccountLocation>
<Area>Network</Area>
<ClosedDate/>
<CommitTime/>
<ContactBusinessPhone>4155551100</ContactBusinessPhone>
<ContactLastName>Kastrup-Larsen</ContactLastName>
<Description>Setting up Router services<Description>
<Priority>3-Medium</Priority>
<SRNumber>1-MYUNIQUEVALUE</SRNumber>
<ServiceRequestType>External</ServiceRequestType>
<ListOfAction>
<Action>
<BillableFlag>N</BillableFlag>
<Description2>test activity1</Description2>
<EstWorkTimeRemaining>8</EstWorkTimeRemaining>
<Planned/>
<PrimaryOwnedBy>SADMIN</PrimaryOwnedBy>
<RowStatusOld>N</RowStatusOld>
<Status>Unscheduled</Status>
<Type>Appointment</Type>
</Action>
<Action>
<BillableFlag>N</BillableFlag>
<Description2>test activity2</Description2>
<EstWorkTimeRemaining>8</EstWorkTimeRemaining>
<Planned/>
<PrimaryOwnedBy>SADMIN</PrimaryOwnedBy>

<Status>Unscheduled</Status>
<Type>Appointment</Type>
</Action>
</ListOfAction>
</ServiceRequest>
</ListOfSampleServiceRequest>
</SiebelMessage>
For this example to work, you will need to have the contact, Kastrup-Larsen, in the database. If you
try the Insert method against a server database where the contact does not exist, you will receive
the following error:
Picklist validation of field 'Contact Last Name' in integration component 'Service

Request' did not find any matches satisfying the query '[Last Name] = "Kastrup-
Larsen"', and an attempt to create a new record through the picklist failed (SBL-
EAI-04186)
Also, if you try to insert the previous instance a second time, you will receive the following error
message:
IDS_ERR_EAI_SA_INSERT_MATCH_FOUND. Insert operation on integration component

'Service Request' failed because a matching record in business component 'Service
Request' with search specification '[SR Number] = "1-MYUNIQUEVALUE" was found.(SBL-
EAI-04383).
Upsert Method
The Upsert method is similar to the Synchronize method with one exception; the Upsert method does
not delete any records.
The Upsert method will result in insert or update operations. If the record exists, it will be updated.
If the record does not exist, it will be inserted. Unlike the Synchronize method, upsert will not delete
any children.
To determine if an update or insert is performed, the EAI Siebel Adapter runs a query using user keys
fields or the search specifications to determine if the parent or primary record already exists. If the
parent record exists, it will be updated. If no matching parent record is found, the new record will
be inserted. Once again, upsert will not delete any children. If existing children are found, they are
updated.
You can update multiple corresponding top-level parent business component records using one XML
file, as in the following example:
<SiebelMessage MessageId="" MessageType="Integration Object"

IntObjectName="Transaction">
<ListofTransaction>
<Transaction>
<Field1>xxxx</Field1>
<Field2>yyyy</Field2>
...
</Transaction>
<Transaction>
<Field1>aaaa</Field1>

<Field2>bbbb</Field2>
...
</Transaction>
...
</ListofTransaction>
</SiebelMessage>
Update Method
This method is similar to the Synchronize method, except that the EAI Siebel Adapter returns an
error if no match is found for the root component; otherwise, it updates the matching record and
synchronizes all the children. For example, if you send an order with one order item to the EAI Siebel
Adapter, it will take the following actions:
1 Queries for the order, and if it finds a match, it updates the record.
2 Updates or inserts the new order item depending on whether a match was found for the new
order item.
3 Deletes any other order items associated with that order.
Delete Method
You can delete one or more records in a business component that is mapped to the root integration
component, given an integration object instance. A business component record is deleted as
specified by an integration object instance. The integration component instance fields are used to
query the corresponding business component and any records retrieved will be deleted. You invoke
the Delete method using only one of the following method arguments:
A Query By Example (QBE) integration object instance.
A Primary Row Id and Output Integration Object Name.

A Search Specification.
NOTE: To have the EAI Siebel Adapter perform a delete operation, define an integration object that
contains the minimum fields on the primary business component for the business object. The EAI
Siebel Adapter attempts to delete matching records in the business component before deleting the
parent record.
For example, if you pass in this xml document, the Account Test account is deleted.

<SiebelMessage MessageId = "1-2IOY" IntObjectName = "EAI Account" MessageType =
<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<Name>Test account</Name>
<Location>EMV</Location>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>

</SiebelMessage>
Any child contacts that once belonged to the account will still remain in the database, but will not be
associated with this Account.
Execute Method
The Execute method can be specified on the EAI Siebel Adapter to perform combinations of various
operations on components in an integration object instance. This method uses the following
operations:
query
querypage (same as query when used as children operation)
sync (the same method as Synchronize and is the default operation)
upsert
update
updatesync
insert
insertsync
delete
skipnode
skiptree
none
NOTE: A none operation is equivalent to operation sync.
These operations perform the same tasks as the related methods. For example, the delete operation
makes the EAI Siebel Adapter delete the business component record matched to the particular
integration component instance. However, what will be done to the children depends on the
combination of the parent operation and the child operation. For information, see Table 12 on
page 133.
NOTE: The operation method names are case sensitive. If you misspell an operation method, the
EAI Siebel Adapter assumes the default operation.
An XML document sent to a Siebel application can include operations that describe whether a
particular data element needs to be inserted, updated, deleted, synchronized, and so on. These
operations can be specified as an attribute at the component level. They cannot be specified for any
other element.
The following XML example demonstrates using the upsert and delete operation to delete a particular
child record without updating the parent:
<SiebelMessage MessageId="" MessageType="Integration Object" IntObjectName="Sample

Account">

<ListofSampleAccount>
<Account operation="upsert">
<Name>A. K. Parker Distribution</Name>
<Location>HQ-Distribution</Location>
<Organization>North American Organization</ Organization>
<Division/>
<Description>This is the key account in the AK Parker Family</
Description>
<HomePage>www.parker.com</HomePage>
<LineofBusiness>Manufacturing</LineofBusiness>
<ListOfContact>
<Contact operation="delete">
<FirstName>Stan</FirstName>
<JobTitle>Senior Mgr of MIS</JobTitle>
<LastName>Graner</LastName>
<MiddleName>A</MiddleName>
<PersonalContact>N</PersonalContact>
<Account>A. K. Parker Distribution</Account>
<AccountLocation>HQ-Distribution</AccountLocation>
</Contact>
</ListOfContact>
</Account>
</ListofSampleAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
About Execute Method Operations

Specify an attribute named operation, in lowercase, to the components XML element. The legal
values for this attribute are upsert, sync, delete, query, update, insert, updatesync, insertsync,
skipnode, skiptree, and none. If the operation is not specified on the root component, the sync
operation is used as the default.
NOTE: Specifying an operation within the <ListOf> tag is not supported. For information on the
<ListOf> tag, see XML Reference: Siebel Enterprise Application Integration.
Each child node inherits the operation from the parent if another operation is not explicitly specified.
If another operation is explicitly specified, then Table 12 represents the results of the operation on
the current node.
Table 12. Operation Outcomes for the Child Node
What Happens to the Current What Happens to Unmatched

Operation Node Children of Current Node
upsert Update or insert Leave alone
sync Update or insert Delete
update Update Delete
updatesync Update Delete

Table 12. Operation Outcomes for the Child Node
What Happens to the Current What Happens to Unmatched

Operation Node Children of Current Node
insert Insert Leave alone
insertsync Insert Delete
skipnode Skip this node Leave alone
skiptree Skip the tree Not applicable
Example of a Parent Node Using a Sync Operation

This example demonstrates the effects of records after a sync operation is performed. Table 13 is a
high level representation of a parent node using the sync operation of the Execute method.
Table 13. Representation of a Parent Node Using the Sync Operation
Record After Execute

Record In Database Integration Object Instance Operation
Account1 Account1 operation=sync Account1
Contact0 Contact1 Contact1
Record in Database
The code represents GENCOMM0 and GENCOMM1 being retrieved as the contacts for this example.

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
LanguageCode>ENU</LanguageCode>
<Location>San Francisco, CA</Location>
<Name>GenComm</Name>
<ListOfContact>
<Contact>
<FirstName>GENCOMM0</FirstName>
<LastName>GENCOMM0</LastName>
<MiddleName/>
</Contact>
<Contact>
<MiddleName/>

</Contact>
</ListOfContact>
/Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Integration Object Instance

The following code represents the sync operation acting on the contacts from the database.

<ListOfAccount>
<Account operation="sync">
<AccountStatus>Inactive</AccountStatus>
<ListOfContact>
<Contact>
<MiddleName/>
</Contact>
<Contact>
<MiddleName/>
</Contact>
</ListOfContact>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Result Record in Database

The following code represents the results of the sync operation after acting on the two contacts from
the database.

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<AccountStatus>Inactive</AccountStatus>


<ListOfContact>
<Contact>
<MiddleName/>
</Contact>
<Contact>
<MiddleName/>
</Contact>
</ListOfContact>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
In this case, if a matching Account1 exists in the database, then the EAI Siebel Adapter will perform
an update of that record. If no record matching Account1 exists, then the EAI Siebel Adapter will
insert a new account.
For all the matching child contacts, the sync operation is inherited. Therefore, if the child exists, it
will be updated. If the child does not exist, it is inserted. Any child contacts that exist in the database
but do not match the integration object instance (unmatched children) are deleted.
The reason for this logic is that the sync operation makes the record in the database look like the
integration object instance.
Example of a Parent Node Using an Update Operation

This example demonstrates the effects of records after an update operation is performed. Table 14
is a high level representation of a parent node using the update operation of the Execute method.
NOTE: The examples represented by Table 14, Table 15 on page 137, and Table 18 on page 138
basically have the same result. However, as reflected in Table 17 on page 138, the children do not
automatically inherit Update if it is only set for the root.
Table 14. Representation of a Parent Node Using the Update Method

Account1 Account1 operation=update Account1

In this case, if a record matching Account1 exists in the database, then the EAI Siebel Adapter
updates that specific record. If no matching account exists, then the result of the EAI Siebel Adapter
is an error with this message:
Insert operation on integration component 'Account' failed because a matching record

in business component 'Account' with search specification '[Name] = "GenComm" AND
[Location] = "San Francisco, CA"' was found (SBL-EAI-04383)
For all the matching child contacts, the update operation is inherited. Therefore, if the child exists,
it will be updated. If the child does not exist, it is inserted. For child contacts that exist in the
database but do not match the integration object instance, they will be deleted. These may be child
contacts created or associated with the Account by default.
This is very similar to the previous example except the record must exist in the database.
Example of a Parent Using an Update Operation and One More Child

Using an Insert Operation
This example demonstrates the effects on records after an update operation acts on the parent, and
an insert operation acts on one of the children records. Table 15 is a high level representation of this
example.
Table 15. Representation of Two Operations

Contact1 Contact2 operation=insert Contact2
updates that record. If no record matching Account1 exists, then the result from the EAI Siebel
Adapter is an error.
You can also override the parent operation as in the case for Contact2. Since Contact2 does not
exist, and there is an explicit insert operation, it will be inserted. Any unmatched children will be
deleted as part of the parent operation (update). This is the reason why Contact0 is deleted.

If you are explicitly overriding the parent operation, you must make sure the operation applies. For
example, the two combinations in Table 16 and Table 17 on page 138 will fail. In Table 16, it fails
because an insert is attempted when Contact1 already exists in the database.
Table 16. Representation of Overriding a Parent Operation Using Insert

Account1 Account1 operation=update
Contact0 Contact1 operation=insert
Contact1 Contact2 operation=insert
In Table 17, the update fails because SubContact3 inherits from Contact2's operation, and
Subcontact3 does not exist in the database.
Table 17. Representation of Overriding a Parent Operation Using Update

Account1 Account1
Contact1 Contact1
Contact2 Contact2 operation=update
SubContact1 SubContact1
SubContact2 SubContact3
Example of a Parent Using the Update Operation and One More Child
Using the Upsert Operation
This example demonstrates the effects of records after an update operation acts on the parent, and
an upsert operation acts on one of the children records. Table 18 is a high level representation of this
example.
Table 18. Representation of Overriding a Parent Operation Using Upsert

Contact1 Contact2 operation=upsert Contact2

updates that record. If no record matching Account1 exists, then the result of the EAI Siebel Adapter
is an error.
For a record matching Contact2, the upsert operation overrides the update operation. Therefore, if
Contact2 exists, it is updated. If no record matching Contact2 is found, it is inserted. Unmatched
child contacts are deleted.
Example of a Parent Using the Upsert Operation and One More Child
Using the Sync Operation
This example demonstrates the effects of records after an update operation acts on the parent, and
a sync operation acts on one of the children records. Table 19 is a high level representation of this
example.
Table 19. Representation of Overriding a Parent Operation Using Sync

Account1 Account1 operation=upsert Account1
Organization2 Organization1 Organization2
Contact1 Contact2 operation=sync Contact1
Organization2 Organization3 Organization1
Contact2 Organization2
Organization2 Contact2
Organization3
updates that record. If no record matching Account1 exists, then the EAI Siebel Adapter inserts the
record.
For all child contacts, the upsert operation applies. Therefore, if the child exists, it is updated. If the
child does not exist, it is inserted. For child contacts that exist in the database, but do not match the
integration object instance, they will remain unchanged because upsert does not delete children.
In the case of Contact2, which has the sync operation overriding the upsert operation, it is updated,
and its children are synchronized.
Skiptree Operation
The whole sub tree rooted at this node is not processed. It is the same as that whole sub tree not
existing in the integration object instance. Operations specified in child nodes do not affect
processing in any way since the EAI Siebel Adapter does not act on the child.

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>

<SiebelMessage MessageId="1-2RE" MessageType="Integration Object"
IntObjectName="Sample Account" IntObjectFormat="Siebel Hierarchical">
<ListOfSampleAccount>
<Name>foo </Name>
<Location>cold storage</Location>
<ListOfContact>
<Contact operation="skiptree">
<FirstName>firstname</FirstName>
<LastName>contact1</LastName>
<ListOfBusinessAddress>
<BusinessAddress operation="insert">
<City>San Mateo</City>
<Zip>94402</Zip>
<AddressName>primary address</AddressName>
</BusinessAddress>
</ListOfBusinessAddress>
</Contact>
<Contact>
</Contact>
</ListOfContact>
</Account>
</ListOfSampleAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Based on this example, the account is upserted. The processing of the first contact is completely
skipped although the business address child has an insert operation set. Also, the second contact is
upserted.
If the skiptree operation is specified for the account integration component, then the EAI Siebel
Adapter skips processing the complete account. This results in no operation. It is possible to have
many accounts with some having skiptree specified as shown in the following example. The EAI
Siebel Adapter processes the trees that do not have skiptree specified.

IntObjectName="Sample Account" IntObjectFormat="Siebel Hierarchical">
<ListOfSampleAccount>
<Account operation="skiptree">
<Name>foo</Name>
<Location>cold storage<Location/>
</Account>
<Name>bar</Name>
<Location>cold storage<Location/>

</Account>
</ListOfSampleAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Skipnode Operation
Similar to all other Execute operations, the children nodes inherit the semantics of the operation from
the parent nodes. If a node has operation skipnode set, then the EAI Siebel Adapter will skip setting
field values for all children unless a child has an explicit operation set that will override.

IntObjectName="EAI Account" IntObjectFormat="Siebel Hierarchical">
<ListOfAccount>
<Account operation="skipnode">
<Name>foo</Name>
<Location>cold storage</Location>
<ListOfContact>
<Contact operation="upsert">
<IntegrationId>1-123</IntegrationId>
<Contact_Organization>
<Organization operation="insert">MyOrganization</Organization>
</Contact>
<Contact operation="upsert">
<IntegrationId>2-123</IntegrationId>
</Contact>
</ListOfContact>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Based on this example, the account is skipped. However, the EAI Siebel Adapter will attempt to insert
the two contacts.

EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service Method
Arguments

Method Arguments
Each of the EAI Siebel Adapter methods takes arguments that allow you to specify required and
optional information to the adapter. You can locate the arguments for each method (and whether it
can be used as an input argument, output argument, or both) in Table 20.
Table 20. EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service Method Arguments

Argument Query QueryPage Sync Upsert Update Insert Delete Execute
BusObjCacheSize Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
DeleteByUserKey Input Input
ErrorOnNonExistingDelete Input Input
ExecutionMode Input Input Input
IntObjectName - - - - - - Input Input
LastPage Output Output
MessageId Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
NewQuery Input Input
NumOutputObjects Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
OutputIntObjectName Input Input - - - - - Input
PageSize Input Input
PrimaryRowId Input Output Output Output Output Input Input/

Output
QueryByUserKey Input Input
SearchSpec Input Input Input Input
SiebelMessage Input/ Output Input/ Input/ Input/ Input/ Input/ Input/

Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
SortSpec Input Input
StartRowNum Input Input
StatusObject Input Input Input Input Input Input
ViewMode Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input

Arguments
Table 21 presents each argument of the EAI Siebel Adapter business service methods.
Table 21. Defining EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service Method Arguments
Argument Display Name Description
BusObjCacheSize Business Object Default is 5. Maximum number of Business Objects

Cache Size instances cached by the current instance of the EAI
Siebel Adapter. If set to zero, then the EAI Siebel
Adapter does not use the cache.
DeleteByUserKey Delete By User A Boolean argument. Forces the EAI Siebel Adapter
Key to use only the user keys to identify a record.
ErrorOnNonExisting Error On Non A Boolean argument. Determines whether or not the

Delete Existing Delete EAI Siebel Adapter should abort the operation if no
match is found.
ExecutionMode Execution Mode Used to set the direction of a query on a business

component. Valid values are ForwardOnly and
Bidirectional. The default is Bidirectional.
ForwardOnly is more efficient than Bidirectional, and

should be used in cases where you need to process a
large number of records in the forward direction only
(such as for report generation).
For more information on executing queries, see the

topic on the ExecuteQuery business component
method in Siebel Object Interfaces Reference.
IntObjectName Integration Object Name of the integration object to delete.

Name
LastPage Last Page Boolean indicating whether or not the last record in
the query result set has been returned.
MessageId Message Id The MessageId can be used to specify the ID for the
generated message. By default, the EAI Siebel
Adapter generates a unique ID for each message.
However, if you want to use the workflow process
instance ID, then you can use this argument to
specify the ID.
NewQuery New Query Default is False. Boolean indicating whether a new

query should be executed. If set to True, a new query
is executed flushing the cache for that particular
integration object.
NumOutputObjects Number of Output Number of output integration objects.

Integration
Objects

Arguments
Table 21. Defining EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service Method Arguments
OutputIntObjectName Output The name of the integration object that is to be

Integration Object output.
Name
PageSize Page Size Default is 10. Indicates the maximum number of

integration object instances to be returned.
PrimaryRowId Object Id The PrimaryRowId refers to the Id field in the

Business Component, Row_Id at the table level.
PrimaryRowId is only returned as an output

argument if you are passing in one integration object
instance. If you are passing multiple integration
object instances, then this argument is not returned
as an output argument. To obtain the ID field when
multiple integration objects are processed, use the
StatusObject argument.
QueryByUserKey Query By Key A Boolean argument. Forces the EAI Siebel Adapter
to use only the user keys to perform a query.
SearchSpec Search This argument allows you to specify complex search

Specification specifications as free text in a single method
argument. For information, see About Using
Language-Independent Code with the EAI Siebel
Adapter Business Service on page 147.
SiebelMessage Siebel Message The input or the output integration object instance.
SortSpec Sort Specification Default is the SortSpec of the underlying business

component. This argument allows you to specify
complex sort criteria as a free text in a single method
argument, using any business component fields and
standard Siebel sort syntaxfor examples, see Using
Siebel Tools.
StartRowNum Starting Row Default is 0 (first page). Indicates the row in the
Number result set for the QueryPage method to start
retrieving a page of records.
StatusObject Status Object This argument tells the EAI Siebel Adapter whether
or not to return a status message.
ViewMode View Mode Default is All. Visibility mode to be applied to the

Business Object. Valid values are: Manager, Sales
Rep, Personal, Organization, Sub-Organization,
Group, Catalog, and All. Note that the ViewMode user
property on the integration object has priority over
the ViewMode method argument.

EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service About Multivalue Groups in the EAI Siebel Adapter
Business Service
About the SearchSpec Input Method Argument

The SearchSpec input method argument is applicable to the QueryPage, Query, Delete, and Execute
methods. This method argument allows you to specify complex search specifications as free text in
a single method argument. Expressions within a single integration component are restricted only by
the Siebel Query Language supported by the Object Manager. Integration components and fields are
referenced using the following notation:
[IntCompName.IntCompFieldName]
For example, given an integration object definition with two integration components, Account as the
root component and Contact as the child component, the following search specification is allowed:
([Account.Site] LIKE "A*" OR [Account.Site] IS NULL) AND [Contact.PhoneNumber] IS

NOT NULL
This search specification queries accounts that either have a site that starts with the character A, or
do not have a site specified. In addition, for the queried accounts, it queries only those associated
contacts that have a phone number.
NOTE: The operator between fields for a particular integration component instance can be AND
unless between the same field. You use the DOT notation to refer to integration components and their
fields.
You can include the child integration component in a search specification only if its parent
components are also included.
About Multivalue Groups in the EAI

Siebel Adapter Business Service
Multivalue groups (MVGs) in the business components are mapped to separate integration
components. Such integration components are denoted by setting a user property MVG on the
integration component to Y. For information on MVGs, see Chapter 2, Integration Objects.
An integration component instance that corresponds to a primary MVG is denoted by the attribute
IsPrimaryMVG set to Y. This attribute is a hidden integration component field and does not have a
corresponding business component field.

EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service About Multivalue Groups in the EAI Siebel Adapter
Business Service
Each MVG that appears on the client UI is mapped to a separate integration component. For example,
in the Orders Entry - Orders screen, there is an Account Address, a Bill-to Address, and a Ship-to
Address. Each of these MVGs needs a separate integration component definition. Each field defined
for an integration component (represented by the class CSSEAIIntCompFieldDef) maps to a field in
the MVG. For such fields, External Name denotes the name of the business component field as it
appears on the master business component, and the user property MVGFieldName denotes the name
of the business component field as it appears on the MVG business component.
NOTE: Setting a primary record in an MVG is supported only when the Auto Primary property of the
underlying MVLink is specified as Selected or None. If Auto Primary is defined as Default, then the
Object Manager does not allow the EAI Siebel Adapter to set the primary. The exception to this rule
are all the visibility MVG components (components whose records are used by Object Manager to
determine who is going to see their parent records). For information on Auto Primary property, see
Siebel Tools Online Help.
Setting a Primary Position for a Contact

You have a contact with multiple contact positions in a Siebel application. None of these positions
are marked as the primary position for the contact, and you want to select one of them as the
primary position.
To specify a contact position as a primary

1 Create your XML file and insert <IsPrimaryMVG= 'Y'> before the contact position you want to
identify as the primary position for the contact as follows:

- <SiebelMessage MessageId="1-69A" IntObjectFormat="Siebel Hierarchical"
MessageType="Integration Object" IntObjectName="Sample Contact">
- <ListOfSampleContact>
- <Contact>
<FirstName>Pal888</FirstName>
<IntegrationId>65454398</IntegrationId>
<JobTitle>Manager</JobTitle>
<LastName>John888</LastName>
<MiddleName />
<PersonUId>1-Y88H</PersonUId>
- <ListOfContact_Position>
- <Contact_Position IsPrimaryMVG="Y">
<EmployeeFirstName>Siebel</EmployeeFirstName>
<EmployeeLastName>Administrator</EmployeeLastName>
<Position>Siebel Administrator</Position>
<RowStatus>N</RowStatus>
<SalesRep>SADMIN</SalesRep>
</Contact_Position>
</ListOfContact_Position>
</Contact>
</ListOfSampleContact>
</SiebelMessage>.

EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service About Using Language-Independent Code with the
2 Use the Upsert or Sync method to update the account.
About Using Language-Independent

Code with the EAI Siebel Adapter
Business Service
If the user Property AllLangIndependentVals is set to Y at the integration object level, then the EAI
Siebel Adapter uses the language-independent code for its LOVs.
In the outbound direction, for example, the Query method, if the AllLangIndependentVals is set to
Y, then the EAI Siebel Adapter translates the language-dependent values in the Siebel Database to
their language-independent counterpart based on the List Of Values entries in the database.
In the inbound direction, for example the Synchronize method, if the AllLangIndependentVals is set
to Y, then the EAI Siebel Adapter expects language-independent values in the input message, and
translates them to language-dependent values based on the current language setting and the entries
in the List Of Values in the database.
NOTE: The LOV-based fields are always validated using language-dependent values. Using language
independent values for LOVs and MLOVs increases the EAI Siebel Adapter CPU usage by about five
percent, but allows easier communication between systems that operate on different languages.
About LOV Translation and the EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service
The Siebel application distinguishes two types of lists of values (LOV): multilingual LOV (MLOV) and
single-language LOV.
Multilingual LOV (MLOV) stores a language-independent code (LIC) in the Siebel Database that is
translated to a language-dependent value (LDV) for active language by Object Manager. MLOVs are
distinguished by having the Translation Table specified in the Column definition.
Single-language LOV stores the LDV for the current language in the Siebel Database. The Boolean
integration object user property AllLangIndependentVals determines whether the EAI Siebel Adapter
should use LDV (N = no translation necessary) or LIC (Y = translation needed) for such LOVs.
Translating to LIC affects the performance, but allows easier cooperation between systems that
operate on different languages. This option should be especially used by various import and export
utilities. The default value is undefined for backward compatibility with the behavior of release 6.x.
Table 22 explains the behavior of the EAI Siebel Adapter according to the integration object user
property AllLangIndependentVals values.
Table 22. EAI Siebel Adapters Behavior for the User Property AllLangIndependentVals
AllLangIndependentVals Y N Undefined
LOV LIC LDV LDV
MLOV LIC LDV LIC

EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service Siebel EAI and Run-Time Events
Siebel EAI and Run-Time Events

The Siebel application allows triggering workflows based on run-time events or workflow policies.
Run-Time Events. Siebel EAI supports triggering workflows based on run-time events such as Write
Record, which is triggered whenever a record is written. If you use both the EAI Siebel Adapter to
import data into Siebel application and run-time events, pay attention to the following.
For the EAI Siebel Adapter, one call to the EAI Siebel Adapter with an input message is a transaction.
Within a transaction, the EAI Siebel Adapter makes multiple Write Record calls. At any point in the
transaction, if the EAI Siebel Adapter encounters a problem the transaction is rolled back entirely.
However, if you have specified events to trigger at Write Record, such events are invoked as soon as
the EAI Siebel Adapter makes Write Record calls even though the EAI Siebel Adapter may be in the
middle of a transaction. If you have export data workflows triggered on such events, this may lead
to exporting data from Siebel applications that is not committed in Siebel applications and may be
rolled back. It is also possible that your events are triggered when the record is not completely
populated, which leads to situations that are not handled by your specified event processing
workflow.
To avoid the effects of this interaction between the EAI Siebel Adapter and run-time events use the
business service EAI Transaction Service to figure out if a transaction (typically, the EAI Siebel
Adapter) is in progress. You may then want to skip processing that is not desirable when the EAI
Siebel Adapter is in progress.
For example, suppose you have a workflow to export Orders from Siebel applications, which is
triggered whenever the Order record is written. You also import Orders into Siebel applications using
EAI. In such a situation, you do not want to export Orders while they are being imported, because
the import may be aborted and rolled back. You achieve this using the business service EAI
Transaction Service as the first step of the export workflow. If you find that a transaction is in process
you can branch directly to the end step.
Workflow Policies. In addition to Run-Time Events, Siebel applications also support Workflow
Policies as a triggering mechanism for workflows. You can use workflow policies instead of run-time
events to avoid the situation discussed in this section. Use Workflow Policies instead of Run-Time
Events when possible.
Best Practices for Using the EAI Siebel

Adapter Business Service
The following best practices are to be considered when using the EAI Siebel Adapter:
Keep the integration objects small. Basically, inactivate any unused fields in the integration
component. Avoid creating large integration object instances.
Test the developed object definitions using the EAI Siebel Adapter before adding to production.
You need to test your input and output using working and negative scenarios. Also do
performance testing to make sure you are satisfied with the performance of the input and the
output.

EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service Troubleshooting the EAI Siebel Adapter Business
Service
Oracle does not support the use of EAI to update data that is based on administration-type
business components such as Client - Mobile or Position. Only the System Administrator updates
these types of data.
Always use a search specification with the Query() method to avoid receiving every object when
run.
To optimize database performance, you can explicitly specify that the EAI Siebel Adapter use only
user key fields. This feature is available for the methods Query, Delete, and Execute. To use it,
set the input property QueryByUserKey to True for the EAI Siebel Adapter business service and
pass an integration object instance (for example, a Siebel Message) as an input as well. By
default, the Siebel adapter uses all the fields in the input integration object instance.
Troubleshooting the EAI Siebel Adapter

Business Service
The EAI Siebel Adapter natively accesses Siebel objects definitions using the business objects,
integration objects, and business component classes. Because of this design, you might get an EAI
Siebel Adapter error that contains an error message from the Siebel Object Manager. See Figure 1
on page 16 for a logical overview of the Siebel architectural layers. Figure 1 on page 16 also shows
the component events that will help you determine in which layer of the application the problem is
occurring.
The EAI Siebel Adapter functionality must be considered in light of the entire application
functionality. For example, the Siebel Communications product line provides preconfigured Asset
Based Ordering functionality that uses the Siebel workflow process and business service. The
workflow processes use the EAI Siebel Adapter business service to extract data from the database
and to update the database.
When using this functionality, the possibility exists that you might get an error in a step of the
workflow process that indicates a problem with the EAI Siebel Adapter, such as the asset you want
to insert already exists in the system. In this case, you should first verify that you are not inserting
a duplicate asset. If you have validated that the asset is new and not a duplicate, then you need to
research the specifics as to why the EAI Siebel Adapter failed to insert the new asset or attempted
to insert a duplicate asset.
If you have modified the preconfigured Asset integration object or business object, it could be one
of your customizations. For example, perhaps your asset requires additional fields, and you are not
providing those fields in your inbound integration object instance. Therefore, it uses any default
values, thus creating a potential duplicate asset.

EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service Enabling Logging for the EAI Siebel Adapter
Business Service
Enabling Logging for the EAI Siebel

Adapter Business Service
Using component events, logging can be done in the Siebel application. Components are used to
assist with the debugging of problems in the Siebel application. A list of useful and relevant
component events for debugging EAI Siebel Adapter problems are listed in Table 23. These
components events can be enabled on any server component that is capable of running an EAI
process and on the Siebel client. You may wish to enable other events not listed in Table 23.
For more information on how to perform logging in the Siebel clients, see Siebel System Monitoring
and Diagnostics Guide.
Table 23. Component Events for Debugging EAI Siebel Adapter Problems
Event Alias Name Logging Level Description
EAISiebAdpt 4/5 Captures EAI Siebel Adapter related events, including

integration component and integration component
fields accessed and the values for the fields; business
components and business component fields accessed
and the values for the fields.
This is the main event to enable for EAI Siebel Adapter

troubleshooting.
EAISiebAdptPerf 4 Captures EAI Siebel Adapter performance related

events, including operation performed and time for the
operation in milliseconds.
This event summarizes the result of the EAI Siebel

Adapter operation. For more information on
performance logging, see Troubleshooting the EAI
Siebel Adapter Business Service on page 149 and Doc
ID 476905.1 (a HOWTO document) on OracleMetaLink
3. This document was previously published as Siebel
FAQ 1840.
EAISiebAdptSvcArgTrc 3/4 Dumps the inputs and output arguments for the EAI
Siebel Adapter when EnableServiceArgTracing=true.
For more information on argument tracing, see

Enabling Siebel Argument Tracing on page 151.
EAITransaction 4 Captures when an EAI Transaction starts.
EAIInfra 4 Output Message: IntObjType=Contact Interface
Format=Siebel Hierarchical
EAIQrySpec 4 Captures the search specification if one is specified.
SQL 4 Captures SQL executed against the database.

EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service Enabling Siebel Argument Tracing
Table 23. Component Events for Debugging EAI Siebel Adapter Problems
Event Alias Name Logging Level Description
SQLParseAndExecute 4 Captures SQL statements and shows SQL bind

parameters executed. Shows SQL executed against the
database. May sometimes be different than the SQL
show in ObjMgrSQLLog.
ObjMgrLog 4/5 Logs error code and error message encountered by

various Siebel objects.
ObjMgrDataLog 4 Logs the beginning of a transaction for the database

connection.
ObjMgrBusServiceLog 4 Captures creation, deletion and invocation of a

Business Service.
ObjMgrBusCompLog 4 4/5 Captures the beginning and end of the Business

Component creation and deletion.
For all the events listed in Table 23, setting the logging level to level 4 is sufficient for most types of
testing. You can set the component event to level 5 if you want to see debug level output, but it is
not generally recommended as it adds more lines of data to the log file that may or may not be
helpful. Logging level 4/5 represents that a logging level of 4 or 5 is supported.
To enable EAI Siebel Adapter logging

1 Navigate to Administration - Server Configuration > Servers.
2 In the top applet, select the Siebel Server that you want to enable EAI Siebel Adapter logging.
3 In the middle applet, select the Components tab, and highlight the component.
4 In the lower applet, select the Events tab, and set component events.
When you enable the component event logging, make sure you select the appropriate server
component or components involved in the process. For example, if you are testing receiving XML data
in the MQSeries Server Receiver, then you would enable logging on the MQSeriesSrvRcvr component.
You can also use the same srvrmgr command to turn on the component event logging. You will use
the "%" shortcut syntax to enable events. An example of this syntax is "change evtloglvl
EAISIEB%=4 for comp BusIntMgr".
Enabling Siebel Argument Tracing

You can also export input and output arguments in XML format to a file for the EAI Siebel Adapter.
These XML files represent the input and output arguments integration object instances. This is a
useful technique as it writes to a file the integration object instances in the directory where your
Siebel process is running. For example, in the Siebel Developer Web Client, it is c:/siebel/bin.

EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service Configuring the EAI Siebel Adapter Business
Service for Concurrency Control
To enable output arguments tracing

1 Set the server parameter EnableServiceArgTracing to True:
If you are running the Siebel Developer Web Client, add the following to your .cfg file:
[EAISubsys]
EnableServiceArgTracing = TRUE
If you are running the Siebel Web Client, modify the following Siebel Server parameter for
your object manager:
"EnableServiceArgTracing" = true
2 Set the appropriate component event level on your server component through the server
manager on the server or SIEBEL_LOG_EVENTS in the Siebel Developer Web Client.
If you set event to:
=3, then input arguments will be written out to a file when an error happens.
=4, then input and output arguments will be written to a file.
Configuring the EAI Siebel Adapter

Business Service for Concurrency
Control
The EAI Siebel Adapter supports concurrency control to guarantee data integrity and avoid overriding
data by simultaneous users or integration processes. To do so, the EAI Siebel Adapter uses the
Integration Component Key called the Modification Key.
Modification Key
A Modification Key is an Integration Component Key of the type Modification Key. A Modification Key
is a collection of fields that together should be used to verify the version of an integration component
instance. Typically, Modification Key fields are Mod Id fields for the tables used. Multiple Modification
Key fields may be needed, because a business component may be updating multiple tables, either
as extension tables, or through implicit or explicit joins.
The EAI Siebel Adapter methods (Insert, Update, Synchronize, Upsert) check for the existence of a
Modification Key. If no Modification Key is specified in the integration component definition, or if
Modification Key fields are not included in the XML request, the EAI Siebel Adapter does not check
for the record version and proceeds with the requested operation. If a valid Modification Key is found,
but the corresponding record cannot be found, the EAI Siebel Adapter assumes that the record has
been deleted by other users and returns the error SSASqlErrWriteConflict.

If a valid Modification Key as well as the corresponding record can be found, the EAI Siebel Adapter
checks if the Modification Key fields in the XML request and the matched record are consistent. If
any of the fields are inconsistent, the EAI Siebel Adapter assumes that the record has been modified
by other users and returns the error SSASqlErrWriteConflict. If all the fields are consistent, the EAI
Siebel Adapter proceeds with the requested operation.
Modification IDs
To determine which Mod Id fields need to be used as part of a Modification Key, you expose Mod Id
fields for tables whose columns may be updated by that integration object. In some situations you
might need to add corresponding integration component fields as well as business component fields.
NOTE: The EAI Siebel Adapter can update base and extension tables. It may even update joined
table columns through picklists that allow updates.
When using Modification IDs, the following behaviors are present:
All fields must be present in the integration object instance for the Mod Key to be used.
Only one defined Modification Key is present for each integration component. Unlike for User
Keys, multiple Mod Keys are not allowed.
About the Modification ID for a Base Table

The integration component field Mod Id for a base table is created by the Integration Object Builder
Wizard, but you must make sure it is active if it is needed for your business processes.
About the Modification ID for an Extension Table

An extension tables Mod Id field is accessible as extension table name.Mod Id in the business
componentfor example, S_ORG_EXT_X.Mod Id. However, if your business processes require this
field, you manually add it to the integration object definition by copying the Mod Id field and changing
the properties.
About the Modification ID for a Joined Table

A joined tables Mod Id field must be manually added in both business component and integration
object definitions. Business component Mod Id fields for joined tables should:
Be prefixed with CX string and preferably followed by the name of the join
Be Joined over the correct join
Have MODIFICATION_NUM specified as underlying column of type DTYPE_INTEGER

About MVG and MVGAssociation Integration Components

For integration components that are of type MVG or MVGAssociation, in addition to the preceding
steps, you must create user properties MVGFieldName and AssocFieldName for each Modification ID
integration component field, respectively, and set the name of the field shown in the parent business
component as the value.
To configure the EAI Siebel Adapter business service for concurrency control
1 For each integration component, identify all needed Modification IDs:
NOTE: In addition to the Modification ID for the base table, Modification IDs for tables that are
used through one-to-one extension as well as through implicit joins are relevant. For example,
on modifying an account record MODIFICATION_NUM column on S_ORG_EXT is updated, not the
MODIFICATION_NUM column on S_PARTY.
a Identify all active fields in an integration component that will be updated and have to be
concurrency safe.
b Select the corresponding business component, the value in the External Name property of the
integration component.
c For each field identified in Step a, check the value of the Join property of the field. If the join is
not specified, then the field belongs to the base table; otherwise, note the name of the join.
d In the Object explorer, select Business Component > Join and query for the business component
from Step b. Search whether there is an entry whose Alias property matches the name of the
join from Step c:
If a matching Alias is found, then this field belongs to a Joined Table. The name of the
join in Step c is the join name, and the value of the Table property is the joined table.
If no Alias matches, then this is an implicit join to an Extension Table. The name of the
join in Step c is the name of the extension table.
2 Create business component fields for Mod Ids of Joined Tables. For the above example, create a
new field in the business component Account with the following settings:
Name. CX_Primary Organization-S_BU.Mod Id
Join. Primary Organization-S_BU

Column. MODIFICATION_NUM
Type. DTYPE_INTEGER
3 Expose all Modification IDs identified in Step 1 as integration component fields.
4 For MVG and MVG Association integration components, add user property MVGFieldName and
AssocFieldName respectively, on all Modification ID fields as follows:
a Check the Integration Component User Prop sub type for user properties of the integration
component.

b If there is a user property called MVGAssociation, then the integration component is a MVG
Association, but if there is a user property called Association then the integration component is
a MVG.
NOTE: If the integration component is neither an MVG nor an MVG Association, then nothing
needs to be done.
5 Repeat the following steps for each Modification ID field on the integration component:
a Add user property MVGFieldName if MVG, or AssocFieldName if MVG Association.
b Set the value of the user property to the same as the field namefor example, Mod Id,
extension table name.Mod Id, or CX_join.Mod Id.
6 Create Modification Key.
Define a new integration component key of type Modification Key, and include all the integration
component fields exposed in Step 3 on page 154 to this key.
7 Validate integration objects and compile a new SRF.
8 Modify client program to use the Modification Key mechanism:
a The client program should store the value of the Modification IDs when it queries data from the
Siebel Database.
b The client program should send exactly the same values of the Modification IDs that it retrieved
from the Siebel Database when sending an update.
c The client program should not send any Modification IDs when sending a new record to the Siebel
application. If this is violated, the client program generates an error indicating that the record
has been deleted by another user.
Integration Component Account Example

Consider an integration component Account of the business component Account:
Field Home Page has property Join set to S_ORG_EXT. This is an implicit join, because it is not
listed in the joins; therefore, this field belongs to Extension Table S_ORG_EXT.
Field Primary Organization has property Join set to Primary Organization-S_BU. This is an explicit
join, because it is listed in the joins. The value of Table property is S_BU; therefore, this field
belongs to Joined Table S_BU joined over Primary Organization-S_BU.
Activate integration component field Mod Id:

Set Name, External Name, XML Tag properties to Mod Id
Set External Data Type property to DTYPE_NUMBER
Set External Length property to 30
Set Type property to System
Add integration component field S_ORG_EXT.Mod Id:
Set Name, External Name, XML Tag properties to S_ORG_EXT.Mod Id

Add integration component field CX_Primary Organization-S_BU.Mod Id:
Set Name, External Name, XML Tag properties to CX_Primary Organization-S_BU.Mod Id
Integration Component Account_Organization Example

Consider the integration component Account_Organization of the Sample Account integration object.
Account_Organization is an MVG Association as denoted by the presence of the user property
MVGAssociation. Assume two Modification IDs, Mod Id and S_ORG_EXT.Mod Id, were exposed on this
integration component:
1 For field Mod Id create a new user property with the name of AssocFieldName with a value of
Mod Id.
2 For field S_ORG_EXT.Mod Id create a new user property with the name of AssocFieldName with
a value of S_ORG_EXT.Mod Id.
In this integration component example, Account of the Sample Account integration object, takes the
following action:
3 Create a new Integration Component key called Modification Key.
4 Set the type of the key as Modification Key.
5 Add integration component fields Mod Id, S_ORG_EXT.Mod Id, and S_BU.Mod Id to the
Modification Key.
Status IDs
When using Status IDs with Modification IDs, the following behavior can be present:
All fields must be present in the integration object instance for the Modification Key to be used.
Only one defined Modification Key is present for each integration component. Unlike User Keys,
multiple Modification Keys are not used with Status IDs.

7 EAI UI Data Adapter Business

Service
This chapter includes the following topics:
About the EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service on page 157
EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service Methods on page 158
EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service Method Arguments on page 175
Exposing Siebel Data to External Applications on page 176
About the EAI UI Data Adapter Business

Service
The EAI UI Data Adapter business service exposes an interface with weakly-typed arguments that
can query and update data in the Siebel database. The EAI UI Data Adapter service is called indirectly
by UI Data Sync Services, which are published externally as Web services.
The EAI UI Data Adapter is similar to the EAI Siebel Adapter business service, but contains key
differences that make it more suitable for UI rendering by custom Web applications. The differences
are summarized as follows:
Row Id as User Key. Unlike the EAI Siebel Adapter, the EAI UI Data Adapter does not use user
keys defined in the integration object. It uses an implicit, hard-coded user key, which comprises
the Row Id field.
For more information about how User Keys are used with the EAI Siebel Adapter, see Integration
Component Keys on page 29.
Row Id and Mod Id as Status Key. Unlike the EAI Siebel Adapter, the EAI UI Data Adapter
does not use status keys defined in the integration object. It uses an implicit, hard-coded status
key, which comprises the fields Row Id and Mod Id.
For more information about how Status Keys are used with the EAI Siebel Adapter, see
Integration Component Keys on page 29.

EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service Methods
Operation Semantics on Leaf Nodes. In an integration object hierarchy, nodes with at least
one child are called internal nodes and nodes without children are called leaf nodes. When either
the insert or update method is called on the EAI Siebel Adapter, the adapter performs the
operation on both internal nodes and leaf nodes. When the insert or update method is called on
the EAI UI Data Adapter, the adapter performs insert on leaf nodes only as represented in
Figure 29.
Figure 29. Operation Semantics on Leaf Nodes
The match nodes in Figure 29 reflects that the database contains a record with the same user
keys as the integration object instance.
Predefined Queries. The EAI UI Data Adapter extends the Query Page functionality of the EAI
Siebel Adapter. The EAI UI Data Adapter can take the name of a predefined query and execute
the query.
For detailed information about the QueryPage method, see QueryPage Method on page 159.
Child Pagination. The EAI UI Data Adapter supports child pagination, enabling custom UIs to
render one page of data at a time.
For more information, see Root and Child Pagination on page 160.
Strongly Typed Data. Unlike the EAI Siebel Adapter, the EAI UI Data Adapter supports the
exchange of strongly typed data.
The EAI UI Data Adapter is most suitable for use in custom UI development where the service is
called indirectly by Web services. In other types of integration scenarios, the EAI Siebel Adapter is
a more suitable choice. For more information about the EAI Siebel Adapter, see EAI Siebel Adapter
Business Service on page 117.
EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service

Methods
The EAI UI Data Adapter service provides access to the following methods:
QueryPage Method on page 159

UpdateLeaves Method on page 164
InitLeaves Method on page 166
InsertLeaves Method on page 168
DeleteLeaves Method on page 171
Execute Method on page 173
QueryPage Method
Custom UIs can use the QueryPage method to query data in the Siebel database one page at a time.
QueryPage supports both query-by-example (QBE) and predefined queries (PDQ). However, it is
recommended that you use either QBE or a PDQ, but not both at the same time. If both QBE and
PDQ are specified, PDQ overrides QBE. In this case, the EAI UI Data Adapter executes the PDQ,
ignores the QBE, and does not generate an error.
QueryPage Method Arguments

Table 24 lists the method arguments used with the QueryPage method. For a description of the
arguments, see EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service Method Arguments on page 175.
Table 24. Method Arguments for QueryPage
Method Argument Name Input/Output
ExecutionMode Input
LOVLanguageMode Input
NamedSearchSpec Input
NewQuery Input
NumOutputObjects Output
OutputIntObjectName Input
SiebelMessage Input/Output
ViewMode Input

Root and Child Pagination

The EAI UI Data Adapter supports pagination for both root and child components. To support root
and child pagination, the EAI UI Data Adapter requires that you set the attributes listed in Table 25
as part of the integration component instance.
NOTE: Pagination over root components benefits performance because, as long as the search
specification, sort specification, and view mode remain the same, the business component is not re-
executed with each invocation of QueryPage. However, for pagination over child components, the
component is reexecuted every time you invoke QueryPage.
Table 25. Attributes for Root and Child Pagination
Attribute Description
pagesize The number of records to be returned for a component. The

default page size is 10. Note that there is a server parameter that
controls the maximum page size (MaximumPageSize). If the
pagesize attribute is greater than the maximum pagesize defined
in the server parameter, an error occurs.
startrownum Determines the starting point for record retrieval. The 0-based
index of the record within the recordset.
lastpage Indicates whether the record being returned is the last record in
the record set. The value is set by the EAI UI Data Adapter. Valid
values are true or false.
recordcountneeded When set to true, indicates that a record count is needed for this
component. Valid values are true or false.
recordcount Value set by the EAI UI Data Adapter indicating the approximate
record count provided by the object manager based on the search
specification.
Example of QueryPage on Parent and Child Components

This example demonstrates querying on both parent and child components. In this example, the
query is for accounts that begin with A and any associated contacts (First Name and Last Name).
Note that pagesize is 10 and an approximate record count is requested and returned in the response.
Request
<SiebelMessage MessageType="Integration Object" IntObjectName="Account"
IntObjectFormat="Siebel Hierarchical">
<ListOfAccount pagesize="10" startrownum="0" recordcountneeded = "true">
<Account>
<Name>='A'</Name>
<ListOfContact>
<Contact>
<FirstName></FirstName>
<LastName></LastName>
</Contact>

</ListOfContact>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Response
SiebelMessage MessageType="Integration Object" IntObjectName="Account"
<ListOfAccount recordcount="2" lastpage="true">
<Account>
<Name>Adams Tech</Name>
<ListOfContact lastpage="true">
<Contact>
<FirstName>Sally</FirstName>
<LastName>Brown</LastName>
</Contact>
<Contact>
<FirstName>Terry</FirstName>
<LastName>Smith</LastName>
</Contact>
</ListOfContact>
</Account>
<Account>
<Name>Aleph Inc.</Name>
<ListOfContact lastpage="true">
<Contact>
<FirstName>Bill</FirstName>
<LastName>Jones</LastName>
<Contact>
<Contact>
<FirstName>Roland</FirstName>
<LastName>Smith</LastName>
</Contact>
</ListOfContact>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>

Sort Specification
You can specify a sort specification on one or more integration component fields of an integration
component. For each field you want sort on, you must define the attributes listed in Table 26. If both
attributes are not specified, the field is not considered as a sort field.
Table 26. Sort Specification Attributes
Attribute Description
sortorder Determines whether the sort order is ascending or descending.

Valid values are ASC or DEC.
sortsequence Determines the order in which the sort specification is applied.

Valid values are integer numbers.
Example of Sort Specification

This example demonstrates using the QueryPage method with an ascending sort order.
Request
<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<Row_Id>2-1111</Row_Id>
<ListOfContact pagesize="40" startrownum="0" recordcountneeded="true">
<Contact>
<FirstName sortorder="ASC" sortsequence="1"></FirstName>
</Contact>
</ListOfContact>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Response
<ListOfAccount lastpage="true">
<Account>
<Row_ID>2-1111</Row_ID>
<ListOfContact recordcount="3" lastpage="true">
<Contact>
<FirstName>Alice</FirstName>
</Contact>
<Contact>
<FirstName>Bill</FirstName>
</Contact>
<Contact>
<FirstName>Casey</FirstName>
</Contact>

</ListOfContact>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Predefined Query
You can specify the name of a PDQ using the method argument NamedSearchSpec. The EAI UI Data
Adapter uses this value to set the search specification at the business object level.
Search Specification
You can use the searchspec attribute on a component instance for complicated queries.
For example, query by example (QBE) uses AND as the implicit operator between fields. You could
implement OR semantics by using multiple integration component instances, but this would result in
a query for each integration component instance and might result in duplicate records being
returned. In a this case, using the searchspec attribute could avoid this problem.
The syntax for the searchspec attribute is as follows:
Expression: Expression [Binary Operator Expression]
Expression: [Field XML tag] Operator 'Value'
Expression: (Expression)
NOTE: Parentheses can be nested.
Expression: [Field XML tag] IS NULL | [Field XML tag] IS NOT NULL
Expression: EXISTS(Expression) | NOT EXISTS(Expression)
NOTE: In EXISTS and NOT EXISTS expressions, use the business component field names of
multivalue group (MVG) fields, not the integration component XML tag names.
Operator: = | ~= | < | <= | > | >= | <> | LIKE | ~LIKE

Binary Operator: AND | OR
The EAI UI Data Adapter parses the searchspec (unlike the EAI Siebel Adapter) and performs the
following operations before setting the search specification on the business component:
Converts Field XML tags into business component field names. For example, assume two business
component fields, First Name and Last Name, have XML tags FirstName and LastName
respectively. The EAI UI Data Adapter converts the XML tags as shown in Table 27.
Table 27. Example Search Specification Conversion
This Search Spec Will be converted to this
[FirstName] LIKE '*Jon*' AND [First Name] LIKE '*Jon*' AND [Last
[LastName] = 'Doe' Name] = 'Doe'
[FirstName] LIKE '*Jon*' OR [First Name] LIKE '*Jon*' OR [Last
[LastName] LIKE 'Doe*' Name] LIKE 'Doe'

If the input argument LOVLanguageMode is set to LIC, converts LOV values to language
dependent codes. See EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service Method Arguments on page 175.
Validates operators, binary operators, and the syntax of the searchspec.
For more information about query language, see Siebel Developers Reference.
Example of Using the searchspec Attribute

This example demonstrates using the searchspec attribute for the QueryPage method.

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<Id>2-1111</Id>
<ListOfContact pagesize="10" startrownum="0">
<Contact searchspec="[FirstName] LIKE '*Jon*' AND [LastName] = 'Doe'">
<FirstName></FirstName>
<LastName></LastName>
</Contact>
</ListOfContact>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
UpdateLeaves Method
Use UpdateLeaves to update existing records in the Siebel database. When UpdateLeaves is invoked
on an integration object hierarchy, the EAI UI Data Adapter updates leaf nodes only and uses internal
nodes for maintaining parent-child relationships.
Both internal nodes and leaf nodes must have Row Ids specified or the EAI UI Data Adapter generates
an error. The EAI UI Data Adapter also generates an error if it does not find a match for the internal
node and leaf node for a given Row Id.
UpdateLeaves Method Arguments

Table 28 lists the method arguments used with UpdateLeaves. For a complete description of the
method arguments, see EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service Method Arguments on page 175.
Table 28. Method Arguments for UpdateLeaves
BusObjCacheSize Input

Example of Updating Root Component

The following example demonstrates updating a root component.
Request
The following is an example of a request:

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>1-1-1111</Account>
<Employees>4900</Employees>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Response
The following is an example of a response:
<SiebelMessage MessageId="P-3ITT" MessageType="Integration Object"

IntObjectName="Account" IntObjectFormat="Siebel Hierarchical">
<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<Id>1-1-1111</Id>
<Mod_Id>2</Mod_Id>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Example of Updating Child Component

This example demonstrates updating a child component.
Request

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<Id>1-1-1111</Id>
<Employees>5000</Employees>
<ListOfBusiness_Address>
<Business_Address>
<Id>2-2-2222</Id>
<Postal_Code>94404</Postal_Code>
</Business_Address>
</ListOfBusiness_Address>
</Account>
<ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>

Response
<SiebelMessage MessageId="P-3ITW" MessageType="Integration Object"

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<Id>1-1-1111</Id>
<Mod_Id>2</Mod_Id>
<ListOfAccount_Business_Address>
<Business_Address>
<Id>2-2-2222</Id>
<Mod_Id>2</Mod_Id>
</Business_Address>
</ListOfAccount_Business_Address>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
InitLeaves Method
Use InitLeaves to retrieve pre-default values. When InitLeaves is invoked on an integration object
hierarchy, it retrieves the pre-default values for all leaf nodes. All internal nodes must exist in the
database and Row Id must be specified.
InitLeaves Method Arguments

Table 29 lists the method arguments used with the InitLeaves Method. For a complete description of
the method arguments, see EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service Method Arguments on page 175.
Table 29. Method Arguments for InitLeaves
Method Argument Input or Output
ViewMode Input
Example of Using InitLeaves on a Root Component

The following code snippet demonstrates using InitLeaves to retrieve default values for a root
component. In this example the root component is Account.
Request


<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<Currency_Code></Currency_Code>
<Account_Status></Account_Status>
<Location_Type></Location_Type>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Response

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<Account_Status>Active</Account_Status>
<Currency_Code>USD</Currency_Code>
<Location_Type>Corporate Training Center</Location_Type>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Example of Using InitLeaves on a Child Component

The following code snippets demonstrate using InitLeaves to retrieve pre-default values for a child
component. In this example the parent component is Account and the child component is Business
Address.
Request

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<Id>1-111112</Id>
<Business_Address>
<Active_Status></Active_Status>
<Main_Address_Flag></Main_Address_Flag>
</Business_Address>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>

Response

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<Business_Address>
<Active_Status>Y</Active_Status>
<Main_Address_Flag>Y</Main_Address_Flag>
</Business_Address>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
InsertLeaves Method
Use InsertLeaves to insert records into the Siebel database. When InsertLeaves is invoked on an
integration object hierarchy, the EAI UI Data Adapter inserts leaf nodes only and uses internal nodes
for maintaining parent-child relationships:
Internal Nodes. All internal nodes must already exist in the database and Row Id must be
specified (Row Id is the implicit, hard-coded user key used by the EAI UI Data Adapter). If the
internal node does not exist or Row Id is not specified, the EAI UI Data Adapter returns an error.
For more information about user keys, see About the EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service on
page 157.
Leaf Nodes. Whether or not Row Id must be specified for leaf nodes depends on the type of
integration component:
If the integration component represents a normal business component or MVG business

component, Row Id should not be defined, because records for these components are being
inserted.
If the integration component represents an association business component or an MVG

association business component, leaf nodes may or may not have Row Ids defined. If Row
Ids are specified, then the EAI UI Data Adapter creates an association record only. If Row Ids
are not specified, then both a child record and an association record are created.
InsertLeaves returns an integration object hierarchy. Each integration component instance in the
hierarchy has two fields: Row Id and Mod Id (implicit status keys used by the EAI UI Data Adapter).
You can use these fields to retrieve the Row Id of the newly created record.

InsertLeaves Method Arguments

Table 30 lists the method arguments used with the InsertLeaves method. For descriptions of the
methods, see EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service Method Arguments on page 175.
Table 30. Method Arguments for InsertLeaves
Example of Inserting a Root Component

This example code snippet demonstrates inserting a non-existing account.
Request

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<Type>Competitor</Type>
<Name>Dixon Inc.</Name>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Response
<SiebelMessage MessageId="P-3ITI" MessageType="Integration Object"

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<Id>P-5NA84</Id>
<Mod_Id>0</Mod_Id>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Example of Inserting a Child Component

The code snippets in this example demonstrate inserting a non-existing business address for an
existing account.

Request

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<Id>P-5NA84</Id>
<Business_Address>
<City>San Carlos</City>
<Street_Address>1145 laurel street</Street_Address>
<State>CA</State>
</Business_Address>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Response
<SiebelMessage MessageId="P-3ITJ" MessageType="Integration Object"

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<Id>P-5NA84</Id>
<Mod_Id>1</Mod_Id>
<Business_Address>
<Id>P-5NA8B</Id>
<Mod_Id>0</Mod_Id>
</Business_Address>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Example of Inserting an Association Child Component

This example demonstrate inserting an existing organization for an existing account. This operation
associates the organization with the account. If the organization does not exist, the EAI UI Data
Adapter generates an error.
Request


<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<Id>P-5NA84</Id>
<Account_Organization>
<Id>1-123</Id>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Response
<SiebelMessage MessageId="P-3ITL" MessageType="Integration Object"

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<Id>P-5NA84</Id>
<Mod_Id>1</Mod_Id>
<Account_Organization IsPrimaryMVG="Y">
<Id>0-R9NH</Id>
<ModId>9</ModId>
<Account_Organization IsPrimaryMVG="N">
<Id>1-123</Id>
<ModId>0</ModId>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
DeleteLeaves Method
The DeleteLeaves method deletes leaf nodes only. If the Cascade Delete on the Link object is set to
TRUE, then child records are also deleted. Row Ids are required for both internal nodes and leaf
nodes. DeleteLeaves does not return a value when the operation is successful.
Method Arguments for DeleteLeaves

Table 31 lists the method arguments used with DeleteLeaves. For descriptions of the arguments, see
EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service Method Arguments on page 175.

Table 31. Method Arguments for DeleteLeaves
Method Argument Name Input or Output or Both
IntObjectName Input
Example of Deleting a Root Component

This example demonstrates deleting a root component.

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<Id>P-5NA84</Id>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Example of Deleting a Child Component

This example demonstrates deleting a child component.

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<Id>P-5NA84</Id>
<Business_Address>
<Id>P-5NA8B</Id>
</Business_Address>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>

Execute Method
The Execute method allows you to perform multiple operations on multiple business components. It
is the only method that operates on internal nodes. The Execute method returns the same kind of
object that the InsertLeaves method returns. For more information, see InsertLeaves Method on
page 168.
NOTE: the Execute method requires a status object only when it contains an insert operation on a
child integration component instance. However, because the EAI UI Data Adapter processes in a top-
down fashion, it adds a status object to the integration object instance even if an insert operation is
not present.
The operations are defined by the operation attribute on the integration component instance. An
integration component instance can have the following operations as defined in Table 32:
Table 32. Operation Attributes for Execute Method
Operation Description
update Updates the integration component instance
insert Inserts the integration component instance
delete Deletes the integration component instance
skipnode Matches integration component instances and process children
CAUTION: Operations must be specified on every integration component instance. If an operation

is not specified, an implicit Synchronize operation will be performed, which will delete all unmatched
child integration component instances.
Execute Method Arguments

Table 33 lists the method arguments used with the Execute method. For a description of the methods,
see EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service Method Arguments on page 175.
Table 33. Method Arguments for Execute
Example of Using the Execute Method

The following example demonstrates using the Execute method to perform update, insert, and delete
operations on child object. Note that the skipnode operation is defined on the parent object.

Request

<ListOfAccount>
<Account operation="skipnode">
<Id>1-1-1111</Id>
<Business_Address operation="update">
<Id>2-2-2222</Id>
<Postal_Code>94402</Postal_Code> 
</Business_Address>
<Business_Address operation="insert">
<City>San Mateo</City>
<Street_Address>2215 Bridgepointe Parkway</Street_Address>
<State>CA</State>
</Business_Address>
<ListOfContact>
<Contact operation="delete">
<Id>4-4-4444</Id>
</Contact>
</ListOfContact>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>
Response
<SiebelMessage MessageId="42-21YQ" MessageType="Integration Object"

<ListOfAccount>
<Account>
<Id>1-1-1111</Id>
<Mod_Id>3</Mod_Id>
<Business_Address>
<Id>2-2-2222</Id>
<Mod_Id>1</Mod_Id>
</Business_Address>
<Business_Address>
<Id>42-53Q2W</Id>
<Mod_Id>0</Mod_Id>
</Business_Address>
</Account>
</ListOfAccount>
</SiebelMessage>

EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service Method
Arguments
EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service

Method Arguments
The methods exposed in the EAI UI Data Adapter business service take arguments that you use to
specify information that the adapter uses when processing the request. Table 34 summarizes these
method arguments. Subsequent sections describe each method, list the method arguments
applicable to each method, and indicate whether the method argument is used for input or output.
Table 34. EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service Method Arguments
BusObjCacheSize Business Object Maximum Number of Business Objects that can be

Cache Size cached at one time.
ExecutionMode Execution Mode Used to set the direction of a query on a business

component. Valid values are ForwardOnly and
Bidirectional. The default is Bidirectional.
ForwardOnly is more efficient than Bidirectional,

and should be used in cases where you need to
process a large number of records in the forward
direction only (such as for report generation).
For more information on executing queries, see

the topic on the ExecuteQuery business
component method in Siebel Object Interfaces
Reference.
LOVLanguageMode LOV Language Mode Indicates whether the EAI UI Data Adapter needs
to translate the LOV value before sending it to the
object manager. Valid values are LIC or LDC. If LIC
is specified, then the EAI UI Data Adapter expects
language independent values in the input message
and translates them to language dependent values
(based on the current language setting) before the
request is sent to the object manager. If LDC is
specified, the EAI UI Data Adapter does not
translate the value before sending it to the object
manager.
NamedSearchSpec Predefined Query Name of a PDQ. The EAI UI Data Adapter sets the
name of the PDQ on the business object instance.
If NamedSearchSpec and QBE are specified,
NamedSearchSpec is used.
NewQuery New Query Default is False. Boolean indicating whether a new

query should be executed. If set to True, a new
query is executed flushing the cache for that
particular integration object.

EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service Exposing Siebel Data to External Applications
Table 34. EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service Method Arguments
NumOutputObjects Number of Output Number of Integration Objects output

Integration Objects
OutputIntObjectName n/a The name of the integration object that will be

sent in the output.
SiebelMessage Siebel Message Input or output integration object instance.
ViewMode View Mode Visibility algorithm used in addition to a search

specification to determine which records will be
retrieved. The ViewMode method argument is
used to set the View Mode property for all business
components corresponding to the integration
object. Valid values are Manager, Sales Rep,
Personal, Organization, Sub-Organization, Group,
Catalog, and All.
Exposing Siebel Data to External

Applications
UI Data Sync (UDS) Web services provide external Web applications access to Siebel data and
functionality. UDS services expose version-independent interfaces with strongly typed arguments
and provide access to UI operations such as insert, delete, update, and query.
Some UDS Web services have already been preconfigured in Siebel Tools. For information on
preconfigured UDS services, see Siebel Web UI Dynamic Developer Kit Guide.
The following procedure details how to reuse an integration object with the Data Access Service
wizard in Siebel Tools to create a new UDS Web service and deploy it to the Siebel run-time database.
NOTE: You can also create a new integration object in this wizard, in which case the Integration
Object Builder wizard is also started. For more information on using the Integration Object Builder
wizard, see Creating Integration Objects Using the EAI Siebel Wizard Business Service on page 40.
To make Siebel data accessible to external applications

1 In Siebel Tools, create a new project and lock the project, or lock an existing project.
3 Click the EAI tab, and then double-click Data Access Service.
The Integration Object Page of the Data Access Service wizard appears.
a Select the locked project in which you want the business service and integration object to be.
b Choose whether to create a new integration object or reuse one.
If you choose to create a new one, the Integration Object Builder wizard will start when
you click Next.

If you choose to reuse an integration object, select it from the drop-down menu.
c Click Next.
4 On the Business Service Page:
a Name the new business service.
The UI Data Service is the only available base service.
b (Optional) Select the Deploy Business Service checkbox to deploy the business service to the
run-time database.
Deployed business services are shown in the Administration - Business Services screen in the
Siebel client.
c Click Next.
5 On the UDS Methods Page, choose the methods to be exposed on the business service, and then
click Next.
The choices are the following:
Insert
Update
QueryPage
Delete
Execute
Init
6 On the Web Service Page:
a In the URL for Web field, replace <webserver> with a valid host name and <lang> with a valid
language code, such as enu.
b Click Browse to choose a location to save the WSDL file.
c Click Next.
7 (Optional) On the Report page:
a Expand the integration object and integration components, and then select an integration
component field to display the associated business component.
b Select UI Business.
c Click Browse to choose a location to save the exported report file.
8 Click Next.
9 (Optional) On the Integration Object Builder page, select the Deploy the Integration Object
checkbox to deploy the integration object to the run-time database.
NOTE: If you deploy integration objects while the Siebel Server is running, you must
subsequently clear the Web services cache in the Administration - Web Services > Inbound (or
Outbound) Web Services view.
10 Click Finish.

The business service, Web service, and integration object (if new) are created.

8 Siebel Virtual Business

Components
This chapter describes the virtual business component (VBC), its uses, and restrictions. This chapter
also describes how you can create a new VBC in Siebel Tools. The following topics are included:
About Virtual Business Components on page 179
Using Virtual Business Components on page 181
XML Gateway Service on page 183
Examples of the Outgoing XML Format on page 186
Search-Spec Node-Type Values on page 191
Examples of Incoming XML Format on page 192
External Application Setup on page 195
Custom Business Service Methods on page 195
Custom Business Service Example on page 211
About Virtual Business Components

A virtual business component (VBC) provides a way to access data that resides in an external data
source using a Siebel business component. The VBC does not map to an underlying table in the Siebel
Database. You create a new VBC in Siebel Tools and compile it into the siebel.srf file. The VBC calls
a Siebel business service to provide a transport mechanism.
You can take two approaches to use VBCs, as illustrated in Figure 30 on page 180:
Use the XML Gateway business service to pass data between the VBC and one of the Siebel
transports, such as the EAI HTTP Transport or the EAI MSMQ Transport.

Siebel Virtual Business Components About Virtual Business Components
Write your own business service in Siebel eScript or in Siebel VB to implement the methods
described in this chapter.
Figure 30. Two Approaches to Building Virtual Business Components
Using VBCs for Your Business Requirements

The following features enhance the functionality of VBCs to better assist you in meeting your
business requirements:
VBCs support drilldown behavior:
You can drill down on a VBC to a standard business component, another VBC, or the same
VBC.
You can drill down onto a VBC from a standard business component, another VBC, or the
same VBC.
A parent applet can be based on a VBC.
You can define VBCs that can participate as a parent in a business object. The VBC you define
can be a parent to a standard BC or a VBC.
You still can use an older version of the XML format or property set by setting the VBC
Compatibility Mode parameter to the appropriate version. For information, see Table 35 on
page 182.
You can pass search and sort specifications to the business service used by a VBC.

Siebel Virtual Business Components Using Virtual Business Components
You can use Validation, Pre Default Value, Post Default Value, Link Specification, and No Copy
attributes of the VBC fields.
You can use predefined queries with VBC.
You can have picklists based on VBC, and use the picklist properties such as No Insert, No Delete,
No Update, No Merge, Search Specification, and Sort Specification.
You can use the Cascade Delete, Search Spec, Sort Spec, No Insert, No Update, and No Delete
link properties when a VBC is the child business component on the link.
You can use No Insert, No Update, No Delete, Search Spec, Sort Spec, and Maximum Cursor Size
business component properties.
Usage and Restrictions of Virtual Business Components

The following are the uses and restrictions of VBCs:
You can define a business object as containing both standard business components and VBCs.
When configuring applets based on VBCs, use CSSFrame (Form) and CSSFrameList (List) instead
of specialized applet classes.
Using the same name for the VBC field names and the remote data source field names may
reduce the amount of required programming. (Optional)
VBCs cannot be docked, so they do not apply to remote users.
VBCs cannot contain a multivalue group (MVG).
VBCs do not support many-to-many relationships.
VBCs cannot be loaded using Enterprise Integration Manager.
Standard business components cannot contain multivalue groups based on VBCs.
VBCs cannot be implemented using any business component class other than CSSBCVExtern.
This means specialized business components such as Quotes and Forecasts cannot be
implemented as VBCs.
You cannot use Workflow Monitor to monitor VBCs.
Using Virtual Business Components

To use VBCs to share data with an external application, perform the following high-level tasks:
Create a new VBC.
For information, see Creating a New Virtual Business Component on page 182.
Set the User Properties on VBCs.
For information, see Setting User Properties for the Virtual Business Component on page 182.
Configure your VBC Business Service:

Siebel Virtual Business Components Using Virtual Business Components
Configure your XML Gateway Service or write your own Business Service.
For information, see XML Gateway Service on page 183 and Custom Business Service
Methods on page 195.
Configure your external application.
For information, see External Application Setup on page 195.
Creating a New Virtual Business Component

You create a new VBC in Siebel Tools.
To create a new virtual business component

1 In Siebel Tools, lock the appropriate project.
2 In the Object Explorer, select the Business Component object.
4 Name the business component.
5 Select the project you locked in Step 1.
6 Set the class to CSSBCVExtern. This class provides the VBC functionality.
Setting User Properties for the Virtual Business

Component
When defining the VBC, you must provide the user properties shown in Table 35.
Table 35. Setting Virtual Business Component User Properties
User Property Description
Service Name The name of the business service.
Service Parameters (Optional) Any parameters required by the business service. The
Siebel application passes this user property, as an input argument, to
the business service.

Siebel Virtual Business Components XML Gateway Service
Table 35. Setting Virtual Business Component User Properties
User Property Description
Remote Source (Optional) External data source that the business service is to use.
This property allows the VBC to pass a root property argument to the
underlying business service, but it does not allow a connection directly
to the external datasource. The Siebel application passes only this
user property as an input argument.
VBC Compatibility Mode (Optional) Determines the format of the property set passed from a
VBC to a business service, or the format in which the outgoing XML
from the XML Gateway will be. A valid value is Siebel xxx, where xxx
can be any Siebel release number. Some examples would be Siebel 6
or Siebel 7.0.4. If xxx is less than 7.5, the format will be in a release
that is earlier than release 7.5. Otherwise, a new property set, and the
XML format will be passed.
If you are creating a VBC in 7.5, there is no need to define this new
user property, because the default is to use the new PropertySet from
a VBC and the new outgoing XML from the XML Gateway.
For your existing VBC implementation, update your VBC definition by

adding this new user property, and setting it to Siebel xxx, where xxx
is the version number that you want.
To define user properties for a virtual business component

1 In the Object List Editor in Siebel Tools, select the virtual business component for which you want
to define user properties.
2 In the Object Explorer, expand the Business Component tree, and then select Business
Component User Prop.
3 In the Object List Editor, click in the Business Component User Props list, right-click, and then
choose New Record.
4 Type the name of the user property, such as Service Name, in the Name field.
5 Type the value of the user property, such as a business service name, in the Value field.
6 Repeat the process for every user property you want to define for this VBC.
NOTE: For the list of different property sets and their format, see Examples of the Outgoing XML
Format on page 186 and Examples of Incoming XML Format on page 192.
XML Gateway Service

The XML Gateway business service communicates between Siebel applications and external data
sources using XML as the data format. For information on XML format, see Examples of the Outgoing
XML Format on page 186 and Examples of Incoming XML Format on page 192. The XML Gateway
business service can be configured to use one of the following transports:

EAI MQSeries Server Transport
EAI HTTP Transport
EAI MSMQ Transport
You can configure the XML Gateway by specifying the transport protocol and the transport
parameters you use in the Service Parameters User Property of the VBC, as shown in Table 36. When
using the XML Gateway, specify the following user properties for your VBC.
Table 36. User Properties
Name Value
Service Name XML Gateway
Service Parameters variable1 name=variable1 value;

variable2 name=variable2 value>;...
Remote Source External Data Source
VBC Compatibility Mode Siebel xxx, where xxx can be any Siebel release number.
NOTE: You can concatenate multiple name-value pairs using a semicolon (;), but do not use any
spaces between the name, the equal sign, the value, and the semicolon.
For example, if you want to specify the EAI HTTP Transport, you may use something like the
following:
"Transport=EAI HTTP Transport;HTTPRequestURLTemplate=<your

URL>;HTTPRequestMethod=POST"
You can also implement VBC with MQSeries. The following procedure lists the steps you take to
implement this.
To implement a VBC with MQSeries

1 Call the EAI Business Integration Manager (Server Request) business service.
2 Define another service parameter for the name of a workflow process to run, with the following
user properties on the VBC:
Service Name. XML Gateway.
Service Parameters. Transport=EAI Business Integration Manager (Server

Request);ProcessName=EAITEST.
3 Define a workflow process, EAITEST, to call the EAI MQSeries Server Transport with the
SendReceive method.
4 Define a new process property, <Value>, on the workflow process, and use it as an output
argument on the EAI MQSeries Server Transport step in the workflow process.

XML Gateway Methods

The XML Gateway provides the methods presented in Table 37.
Table 37. XML Gateway Methods
Method Description
Init Initializes the XML Gateway business service for every business component.
Delete Deletes a given record in the remote data source.
Insert Inserts a record into a remote data source.
PreInsert Performs an operation that tests for the existence of the given business component.
Only default values are returned from the external application.
Query Queries the given business component from the given data source.
Update Updates a record in the remote data source.

Siebel Virtual Business Components Examples of the Outgoing XML Format
XML Gateway Method Arguments

The XML Gateway init, delete, insert, preInsert, query, and update methods take the arguments
presented in Table 38.
Table 38. XML Gateway Arguments
Argument Description
Remote Source The VBC Remote Source user property. The remote source from
which the service is to retrieve data for the business component.
This must be a valid connect string. When configuring the
repository business component on top of the specialized business
component class CSSBCVExten, you can define a user property
Remote Source to allow the Transport Services to determine the
remote destination and any connect information. If this user
property is defined, it is passed to every request as the <remote-
source> tag.
Business Component Id Unique key for the given business component.
Business Component Name Name of the business component or its equivalent, such as a table
name.
Parameters The VBC Service Parameters user property. A set of string

parameters required for initializing the XML Gateway.
Examples of the Outgoing XML Format

Examples of the XML documents generated and sent by the XML Gateway to the external system are
presented in Table 39. These examples are based on the example in Custom Business Service
Example on page 211. See Appendix C, DTDs for XML Gateway Business Service, for examples of the
DTDs that correspond to each of these methods.
NOTE: The XML examples in this chapter have extraneous carriage returns and line feeds for ease
of reading. Delete all the carriage returns and line feeds before using any of the examples.

Table 39. Outgoing XML Tags and Descriptions
Method Format of the XML Stream Description
Delete Request <siebel-xmlext-delete-req> siebel-xmlext-delete-req.
<buscomp id="1">Contact</ This tag requests removal of a single

buscomp> record in the remote system.
<remote-source>http://throth/
servlet/VBCContacts</remote-
source>
<row>
<value
field="AccountId">146</value>
<value field="Name">Max
Adams</value>
<value
field="Phone">(408)234-1029</
value>
<value field="Location">San
Jose</value>
<value
field="AccessId">146</value>
</row>
</siebel-xmlext-delete-req>
Init Request <siebel-xmlext-fields-req> siebel-xmlext-fields-req
<buscomp id="1">Contact</buscomp> This tag fetches the list of fields

supported by this instance.
servlet/VBCContacts</remote- buscomp Id.
source>
The business component ID.
</siebel-xmlext-fields-req>
remote-source.
The remote source from which the

service is to retrieve data for the
business component.

Insert Request <siebel-xmlext-insert-req> siebel-xmlext-Insert-req.
<buscomp id="1">Contact</ This tag requests the commit of a new

buscomp> record in the remote system.
<remote-source>http://throth/ The insert-req XML stream contains
servlet/VBCContacts</remote- values for fields entered through the
source> business component.
<row>
<value field="AccountId">1-
6</value>
<value field="Name">Max
Adams</value>
<value
field="Phone">(398)765-1290</
value>
<value
field="Location">Troy</value>
<value field="AccessId"></
value>
</row>
</siebel-xmlext-insert-req>
PreInsert Request <siebel-xmlext-preinsert-req> siebel-xmlext-preinsert-req.
<buscomp id="1">Contact</ This tag allows the connector to

buscomp> provide default values. This operation
is called when a new row is created,
servlet/VBCContacts</remote- but before any values are entered
source> through the business component
interface.
</siebel-xmlext-preinsert-req>

Query Request <siebel-xmlext-query-req> siebel-xmlext-query-req.
<buscomp id="1">Contact</ This tag queries by example. The

buscomp> query-req XML stream contains
parameters necessary to set up the
servlet/VBCContacts</remote- query. In this example, the query
source> requests that record information be
returned from the remote system.
<max-rows>6</max-rows>
max-rows.
<search-string>=([Phone] IS NOT
NULL) AND ([AccountId] = "1-6")</ Maximum number of rows to be
search-string> returned. The value is the Maximum
Cursor Size defined at the VBC plus
<search-spec> one. If the Maximum Cursor Size
property is not defined at the VBC,
<node node-type="Binary
then the max-rows property is not
Operator">AND
passed.
<node node-type="Unary
search-string.
Operator">IS NOT NULL
The search specification used to
<node node-
query and filter the information.
type="Identifier">Phone</node>
search-spec.
</node>
Hierarchical representation of the
<node node-type="Binary search-string. For information, see
Operator">=
Search-Spec Node-Type Values on
<node node- page 191.
type="Identifier">AccountId</
sort-spec.
node>
List of sort fields and sort order.
<node value-type="TEXT"
node-type="Constant">1-6</node>
</node>
</node>
</search-spec>
<sort-spec>
<sort
field="Location">ASCENDING</
sort>
<sort field="Name">DESCENDING</
sort>
</sort-spec>
</Siebel-xmlext-query-req>
Update Request <siebel-xmlext-update-req> siebel-xmlext-Update-req.
<buscomp id="2">Contact</ This tag requests changes to the field

buscomp> values for an existing row.
<remote-source>http://throth/ All values for the record are passed
servlet/VBCContacts</remote- with the <value> tags, and with the
source> changed attribute identifying the
<row> ones that have been changed through
the Siebel application.
<value changed="false"
field="AccountId">1-6</value>
field="Name">Max Adams</value>
<value changed="true"
field="Phone">(408)234-1029</
value>
<value changed="true"
field="Location">San Jose</value>
field="AccessId">146</value>
</row>
</siebel-xmlext-update-req>

Siebel Virtual Business Components Search-Spec Node-Type Values
Search-Spec Node-Type Values

The search-string is in the Siebel query language format. The search-string is parsed by the Siebel
query object and then turned into the hierarchical search-spec. Table 40 shows the different search-
spec node-types and their values.
Table 40. Search-Spec Node-Types
Node-Type PropertySet/XML Representation
Constant Example: <node node-type = "Constant"
value-type="NUMBER">1000</node>
The valid value-types are TEXT, NUMBER, DATETIME, UTCDATETIME, DATE, and
TIME.
Identifier Example: <node node-type="Identifier">Name</node>
The value Name is a valid business component field name.

Unary Operator Example: <node node-type="Unary Operator">NOT</node>
The valid values are NOT, EXISTS, IS NULL, IS NOT NULL.
Binary Operator Example: <node node-type= "Binary Operator" >AND</node>
The valid values are LIKE, NOT LIKE, SOUNDSLIKE, =, <>, <=, <, >=, >, AND,
OR, +, -, *, /, ^.

Siebel Virtual Business Components Examples of Incoming XML Format
Examples of Incoming XML Format

Table 41 contains examples of XML documents that are sent from an external system to the XML
Gateway in response to a request. These examples are based on the example in Custom Business
Service Example on page 211. See Appendix C, DTDs for XML Gateway Business Service, for
examples of the DTDs that correspond to each of these methods.
Table 41. Incoming XML Tags and Descriptions
Delete Return <siebel-xmlext-delete-ret /> siebel-xmlext-delete-ret.
Only the XML stream tag is returned.
Error <siebel-xmlext-status> Format of the XML stream expected by

the Siebel application in case of an error
<status-code>4</code> in the external application. The tags for
<error-field>Name</error-field> this XML stream, including the entire
XML stream, are optional. If the error is
<error-text>Name must not be specific to a field, the field name should
empty</error-text> be specified.
</siebel-xmlext-status> siebel-xmlext-status.
This tag is used to check the status

returned by the external system.
status-code.
This tag overrides the return value.
error-text.
This tag specifies textual representation

of the error, if it is available. This tag
appears in addition to the standard error
message. For example, if the Siebel
application attempts to update a record
in the external system with a NULL
Name, and this is not allowed in the
external system, then the error text is
set to: Name must not be empty.

Init Return <siebel-xmlext-fields-ret> siebel-xmlext-fields-ret.
<support field="AccountId"/> The fields-ret XML stream return

contains the list of VBC fields supported
<support field="Name"/> by the external application for this
instance.
<support field="Phone"/>
<support field="Location"/> The following field names are reserved

by the Siebel application, and should not
<support field="AccessId"/> appear in this list:
</siebel-xmlext-fields-ret> Id, Created, Created By, Updated,

Updated By.
Insert Return <siebel-xmlext-insert-ret> siebel-xmlext-insert-ret.
<row> If the remote system has inserted

records, they can be returned to be
<value field="AccountId">1-6</
reflected in the business component in
value>
an insert-ret XML stream in the <row>
<value field="Name">Max tag format as the insert-ret stream.
Adams</value>
<value field="Phone">(398)765-
1290</value>
<value field="Location">Troy</
value>
<value field="AccessId">146</
value>
</row>
</siebel-xmlext-insert-ret>
PreInsert <siebel-xmlext-preinsert-ret> siebel-xmlext-preinsert-ret.
Return
<row> Returns default values for each field, if
there is any default value.
Jose</value>
</row>
</siebel-xmlext-preinsert-ret>

Query Return <siebel-xmlext-query-ret> siebel-xmlext-query-ret.
<row> The query-ret XML stream contains the

result set that matches the criteria of
<value field="AccountId">1-6</ the query.
value>
row.
<value field="Name">Sara
Chen</value> This tag indicates the number of rows
returned by the query. Each row must
contain one or more <values>. The
7890</value>
attributes that appear in <row> tags
<value field="Location">San must be able to uniquely identify the
Francisco</value> rows. If there is a unique key in the
remote data source, it appears in the
<value field="AccessId">128</ result set. If not, a unique key is
value>
generated. It is necessary to identify
</row> specific rows for DML operations.
<row> value.
<value field="AccountId">1-6</ This tag specifies the field and value

value> pairs and should be the same for each
row in the set.
<value field="Name">Eric
Brown</value>
1000</value>
<value field="Location">Palo
Alto</value>
<value field="AccessId">129</
value>
</row>
</siebel-xmlext-query-ret>

Siebel Virtual Business Components External Application Setup
Update <siebel-xmlext-update-ret> siebel-xmlext-update-ret.

Return
<row> If the remote system updated fields, the
fields can be returned to be reflected in
the business component in an update-
Jose</value>
ret XML stream in the <row> tag format
<value field="Phone">(408)234- as the update-ret stream.
1029</value>
</row>
</siebel-xmlext-update-ret>
External Application Setup

When you have your XML Gateway Service configured, set up your external application accordingly
to receive and respond to the requests. At a minimum, the external application needs to support the
Init() and Query() methods, and depending upon the functionality provided by the VBC, the
remaining methods may or may not be necessary.
Custom Business Service Methods

Your business service must implement the Init and Query methods as described in this section. The
Delete, PreInsert, Insert, and Update methods are optional, and depend on the functionality required
by the VBC.
NOTE: Custom business services can be based only on the CSSService class, as specified in Siebel
Tools.
These methods pass property sets between the VBC and the business service. VBC methods take
property sets as arguments. Each method takes two property sets: an Inputs property set and an
Outputs property set. The methods are called by the CSSBCVExtern class in response to requests
from other objects that refer to, or are based on the VBC.
If VBCs are used, custom business services are written to access external relational databases.
However, it is recommended that you use external business components (EBCs) to access these
databases instead of writing custom business services. For more information on EBCs, see
Chapter 10, External Business Components.

Siebel Virtual Business Components Custom Business Service Methods
Common Method Parameters

Table 42 shows the input parameters common to every method. Note that all these parameters are
at the root property set.
Table 42. Common Input Parameters
Parameter Description
Remote Source (Optional) Specifies the name of an external data source. This
is the VBCs Remote Source user property, if defined. For
information, see Table 35 on page 182.
Business Component Name Name of the active VBC.
Business Component Id Internally generated unique value that represents the VBC.
Parameters (Optional) The VBCs Service Parameters user property, if

defined. For information, see Table 35 on page 182. A set of
parameters required by the business service.
VBC Compatibility Mode (Optional) This is the VBCs Compatibility Mode user property, if
defined. For information, see Table 35 on page 182.
When a response has been received, the method packages the response from the external data
source into the outputs property set.
Business Services Methods and Their Property Sets

The following examples display each method's input and output property sets for a VBC Contact that
displays simple contact information for a given account. These examples are based on the example
in the Custom Business Service Example on page 211.
Please add a note that the output property set of Insert and Update methods for VBC does not affect
the data in the business component unlike Query method which uses the output property set to
populate the business component. The output property set for Insert and Update is used to indicate
that what fields or record has been changed.
NOTE: All the optional parameters have been omitted from these examples to simplify them.

Delete
The Delete method is called when a record is deleted. Figure 31 illustrates the property set for the
Delete input.
Figure 31. Delete Input Property Set
The following is the XML representation of the property set shown in Figure 31:
<?Siebel-Property-Set EscapeNames="true"?>
<PropertySet
Business_spcComponent_spcId="1"
Business_spcComponent_spcName="Contact">
<PropertySet
AccountId="1-6"
Name="Max Adams"
Phone="(408)234-1029"
Location="San Jose"

AccessId="146" />
</PropertySet>
Figure 32 illustrates the property set for the Delete output.
Figure 32. Delete Output Property Set
<PropertySet />
Error Return
Figure 33 illustrates the property set for the Error Return, when an error is detected.
Figure 33. Error Return Property Set

The following is the XML representation of the property set shown in Figure 33 on page 198:
<PropertySet>
<Status Status="4"
Error_spcField="Name"
Error_spcText="Name must not be empty"/>
</PropertySet>
Init
The Init method is called when the VBC is first instantiated. It initializes the VBC. It expects to receive
the list of fields supported by the external system.
NOTE: When a field is not initialized in the Init method of the VBC, the Update method is not fired
when the field gets updated.
Figure 34 illustrates the property set for the Init input.
Figure 34. Init Input Property Set
<PropertySet
Business_spcComponent_spcName="Contact"/>

Figure 35 illustrates the property set for the Init output.
Figure 35. Init Output Property Set
<PropertySet
AccountId=""
Name=""
Phone=""
Location=""
AccessId="" />

Insert
The Insert method is called when a New Record is committed. Figure 36 illustrates the property set
for the Insert input.
Figure 36. Insert Input Property Set
<PropertySet
<PropertySet
AccountId="1-6"
Name="Max Adams"
Phone="(398)765-1290"
Location="Troy"

AccessId="" />
</PropertySet>
Figure 37 illustrates the property set for the Insert output.
NOTE: The property set for the Insert output does not affect the data in the business component.
The output property set for Insert is used to indicate what fields or records were changed.
Figure 37. Insert Output Property Set
<PropertySet
<PropertySet
AccountId="1-6"
Name="Max Adams"
Phone="(398)765-1290"
Location="Troy"

AccessId="146" />
</PropertySet>
PreInsert
The PreInsert method is called when a New Record operation is performed. It supplies default values.
Figure 38 illustrates the property set for the PreInsert input.
Figure 38. PreInsert Input Property Set
<PropertySet
Business_spcComponent_spcName="Contact"/>

Figure 39 illustrates the property set for the PreInsert output.
Figure 39. PreInsert Output Property Set
<PropertySet>
<PropertySet Location="San Jose" />
</PropertySet>

Query
The Query method is called when a search is performed. The Query method must be supported by
every VBC. Each record that matches the query is represented as a property set. For example, if 5
records match the query, there will be 5 child property sets. Each property set contains a list of field
namesfield value pairs representing the values of each field for that particular record. Figure 40
and Figure 41 illustrate the property set for the Query input and are followed by its XML
representation.
Figure 40. Query Input Property Set (Part 1)

Figure 41. Query Input Property Set (Part 2)
The following is the XML representation of the property set shown in Figure 40 on page 205 and
Figure 41:
<PropertySet
max-rows="6"
search-string="([Phone] IS NOT NULL) AND ([AccountId] = "1-6")"
<PropertySet AccountId="1-6" />
<search-spec>
<node node-type="Binary Operator">AND
<node node-type="Unary Operator">IS NOT NULL
<node node-type="Identifier">Phone</node>
</node>
<node node-type="Binary Operator">=

<node node-type="Identifier">AccountId</node>
<node value-type="TEXT" node-type="Constant">1-6</node>
</node>
</node>
</search-spec>
<sort-spec>
<sort field="Location">ASCENDING</sort>
<sort field="Name">DESCENDING</sort>
</sort-spec>
</PropertySet>
Figure 42 illustrates the property set for the Query output.
Figure 42. Query Output Property Set

<PropertySet>
<PropertySet
AccountId="1-6"
Name="Sara Chen"
Phone="(415)298-7890"
Location="San Francisco"
AccessId="128" />
<PropertySet
AccountId="1-6"
Name="Eric Brown"
Phone="(650)123-1000"
Location="Palo Alto"
AccessId="129" />
</PropertySet>

Update
The Update method is called when a record is modified. Figure 43 illustrates the property set for the
Update input.
Figure 43. Update Input Property Set
<PropertySet
<PropertySet
Field_spcName="AccountId"
Changed="false"
Field_spcValue="1-6"/>

<PropertySet
Field_spcName="Name"
Changed="false"
Field_spcValue="MaxAdams"/>
<PropertySet
Field_spcName="Phone"
Changed="true"
Field_spcValue="(408)234-1029"/>
<PropertySet
Field_spcName="Location"
Changed="true"
Field_spcValue="SanJose"/>
<PropertySet
Field_spcName="AccessId"
Changed="false"
Field_spcValue="146" />
</PropertySet>

Siebel Virtual Business Components Custom Business Service Example
Figure 44 illustrates the property set for the Update output.
NOTE: The property set for Update output does not affect the data in the business component. The
output property set for Update is used to indicate what fields or records were changed.
Figure 44. Update Output Property Set
<PropertySet
<PropertySet
Phone=="(408)234-1029"
Location="San Jose" />
</PropertySet>
Custom Business Service Example

The following is an example of the Siebel eScript implementation of a business service for a VBC.
The fields configured for this simple VBC are AccountId, Name, Phone, Location, and AccessId.
AccessId is the primary key in the external data source. AccessId is included in the VBC fields to
make updating and deleting the fields simple and is configured as a hidden field:


if (MethodName == "Init") {
return(Init(Inputs, Outputs));
}
else if (MethodName == "Query") {
return(Query(Inputs, Outputs));
}
else if (MethodName == "PreInsert") {
return(PreInsert(Inputs, Outputs));
}
else if (MethodName == "Insert") {
return(Insert(Inputs, Outputs));
}
else if (MethodName == "Update") {
return(Update(Inputs, Outputs));
}
else if (MethodName == "Delete") {
return(Delete(Inputs, Outputs));
}
else {
}
}
function Init (Inputs, Outputs) {
// For debugging purpose...
logPropSet(Inputs, "InitInputs.xml");
Outputs.SetProperty("AccountId", "");
Outputs.SetProperty("Name", "");
Outputs.SetProperty("Phone", "");
Outputs.SetProperty("AccessId", "");
Outputs.SetProperty("Location", "");
logPropSet(Outputs, "InitOutputs.xml");
}
function Query(Inputs, Outputs) {
logPropSet(Inputs, "QueryInputs.xml");
var selectStmt = "select * from Contacts ";
var whereClause = "";
var orderbyClause = "";
// You have the following properties if you want to use them
// Inputs.GetProperty("Business Component Name")
// Inputs.GetProperty("Business Component Id")
// Inputs.GetProperty("Remote Source")
// If you configured Maximum Cursor Size at the buscomp,
// get max-rows property
var maxRows = Inputs.GetProperty("max-rows");
// get search-string
var searchString = Inputs.GetProperty("search-string");
if (searchString != "" )
{
// convert the search-string into a where clause
searchString = stringReplace(searchString, '*', '%');
searchString = stringReplace(searchString, '[', ' ');

searchString = stringReplace(searchString, ']', ' ');

searchString = stringReplace(searchString, '~', ' ');
searchString = stringReplace(searchString, '"', "'");
whereClause = " where ";
whereClause = whereClause + searchString;
}
// match, search-spec, sort-spec
var childCount = Inputs.GetChildCount();
var child, sortProp;
for (var i = 0; i < childCount; i++)
{
child = Inputs.GetChild(i);
if (child.GetType() == "")
{
// Use this child property set if you want to use the old match field list.
// We are not using this in this example. We'll use search-string instead.
}
else if (child.GetType() == "search-spec")
{
// Use this child property set if you want to use the hierarchical
// representation of the search-string.
// We are not using this in this example. We'll use search-string instead.
}
else if (child.GetType() == "sort-spec")
{
// This child property set has the sort spec. We'll use this in this example
orderbyClause = " order by ";
var sortFieldCount = child.GetChildCount();
for (var j = 0; j < sortFieldCount; j++)
{
// compose the order by clause
sortProp = child.GetChild(j);
orderbyClause += sortProp.GetProperty("field");
var sortOrder = sortProp.GetValue();
if (sortOrder == "DESCENDING")
orderbyClause += " desc";
if (j < sortFieldCount-1)
orderbyClause += ", ";
}
}
}
// Now, our complete select statement is...
selectStmt += whereClause + orderbyClause;
// Now, query the data source
var conn = getConnection();
var rs = getRecordset();
rs.Open(selectStmt, conn);
// We're only going to return no more than maxRows of records.
var count = rs.RecordCount();
if (maxRows != "")
if (count > maxRows)
count = maxRows
// We'll go through the recordset and add them to the Outputs PropertySet.
var fcount, fields, row;

for (i = 0; i < count; i++)

{
row = TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
fields = rs.Fields();
fcount = fields.Count();
for (j = 0; j < fcount; j++)
{
var fieldValue = fields.Item(j).Value();
if (fieldValue == null)
row.SetProperty(fields.Item(j).Name(), "");
else
row.SetProperty(fields.Item(j).Name(), fieldValue);
}
Outputs.AddChild(row);
rs.MoveNext();
}
logPropSet(Outputs, "QueryOutputs.xml" );
// clean up
child = null;
sortProp = null;
row = null;
rs.Close();
rs = null;
conn.Close();
conn = null;
}
function PreInsert (Inputs, Outputs) {
logPropSet(Inputs, "PreInsertInputs.xml");
var defaults = TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
defaults.SetProperty("Location", "KO");
Outputs.AddChild(defaults);
logPropSet(Outputs, "PreInsertOutputs.xml");
// clean up
defaults = null;
}
function Insert (Inputs, Outputs) {
logPropSet(Inputs, "InsertInputs.xml");
var fieldList = "";
var valueList = "";
// Inputs should have only 1 child property set.
var child = Inputs.GetChild(0);
var fieldName = child.GetFirstProperty();
var fieldValue;
while (fieldName != "")
{
fieldValue = child.GetProperty(fieldName);
if (fieldValue != "")
{
if (fieldList != "")

{
fieldList += ", ";
valueList += ", ";
}
fieldList += fieldName;
valueList += "'" + fieldValue + "'";
}
fieldName = child.GetNextProperty();
}
// The insert statement is...
var insertStmt = "insert into Contacts (" + fieldList + ") values (" + valueList + ")";
// Now, inserting into the data source...
conn.Execute (insertStmt);
// In this example, we need to query back the record just inserted to get
// the value of its primary key. We made this primary key part of the buscomp
// to make update and delete easy. The primary key is "AccessId".
var selectStmt = "select * from Contacts where ";
var whereClause = "";
child = Inputs.GetChild(0)
fieldName = child.GetFirstProperty();
while (fieldName != "")
{
fieldValue = child.GetProperty(fieldName);
if (fieldName != "AccessId")
{
if (whereClause != "")
whereClause += " and ";
if (fieldValue == "")
whereClause += fieldName + " is null";
else
whereClause += fieldName + "='" + fieldValue + "'";
}
fieldName = child.GetNextProperty();
}
// The select statement is...
selectStmt += whereClause;
// Now, let's select the new record back
// We're expecting only one row back in this example.
var fcount, fields, row, fieldValue;
for (var j = 0; j < fcount; j++)
{
fieldValue = fields.Item(j).Value();
else
}


logPropSet(Outputs, "InsertOutputs.xml");
// clean up
child = null;
row = null;
rs.Close();
rs = null;
conn.Close();
conn = null;
}
function Update (Inputs, Outputs) {
logPropSet(Inputs, "UpdateInputs.xml");
var child;
var childCount = Inputs.GetChildCount();
var fieldName, fieldValue;
var updateStmt = "update Contacts set ";
var setClause = "";
var whereClause;
// Go through each child in Inputs and construct
// necessary sql statements for update and query
for (var i = 0; i < childCount; i++)
{
child = Inputs.GetChild(i);
fieldName = child.GetProperty("Field Name");
fieldValue = child.GetProperty("Field Value");
// We only need to update changed fields.
if (child.GetProperty("Changed") == "true")
{
if (setClause != "")
setClause += ", ";
if (fieldValue == "")
setClause += fieldName + "=null";
else
setClause += fieldName + "='" + fieldValue + "'";
}
if (fieldName == "AccessId")
whereClause = " where AccessId = " + fieldValue;
}
// The update statement is...
updateStmt += setClause + whereClause;
// Now, updating the data source...
conn.Execute (updateStmt);
// How to construct the Outputs PropertySet can vary, but in this example
// We'll query back the updated record from the data source.
var selectStmt = "select * from Contacts" + whereClause;
// Now, let's select the updated record back
// We're expecting only one row back in this example.
// In this example, we're returning all the fields and not just
// the updated fields. You can only return those updated

// fields with the new value in the Outputs property set.

var fcount, fields, row, fieldValue;
for (var j = 0; j < fcount; j++)
{
fieldValue = fields.Item(j).Value();
else
}
logPropSet(Outputs, "UpdateOutputs.xml");
// clean up
child = null;
row = null;
rs.Close();
rs = null;
conn.Close();
conn = null;
}
function Delete (Inputs, Outputs) {
logPropSet(Inputs, "DeleteInputs.xml");
// Inputs should have only 1 child property set.
var child = Inputs.GetChild(0);
// In this example, we're only using the AccessId
// (it's the primary key in the Contacts db)
// for delete statement for simplicity.
var deleteStmt = "delete from Contacts where AccessId = " + child.GetProperty("AccessId");
// Now, let's delete the record from the data source.
conn.Execute(deleteStmt);
logPropSet(Outputs, "DeleteOutputs.xml");
// Returning empty Outputs property set.
// clean up
conn.Close();
conn = null;
}
The following functions are helper functions:

function getConnection () {
// VBCContact is the ODBC data source name
var connectionString = "DSN=VBCContact";
var uid = "";
var passwd = "";
var conn = COMCreateObject("ADODB.Connection");

conn.Mode = 3;
conn.CursorLocation = 3;
conn.Open(connectionString , uid, passwd);
return conn;
}
function getRecordset() {
var rs = COMCreateObject("ADODB.Recordset");
return rs;
}
function logPropSet(inputPS, fileName) {
// Use EAI XML Write to File business service to write
// inputPS property set to fileName file in c:\temp directory.
var fileSvc = TheApplication().GetService("EAI XML Write to File");
var outPS = TheApplication().NewPropertySet();
var fileLoc = "c:\\temp\\" + fileName;
var tmpProp = inputPS.Copy();
tmpProp.SetProperty("FileName", fileLoc);
fileSvc.InvokeMethod("WritePropSet", tmpProp, outPS);
// clean up
outPS = null;
fileSvc = null;
tmpProp = null;
}
function stringReplace (string, from, to) {
// Replaces from with to in string
var stringLength = string.length;
var fromLength = from.length;
if ((stringLength == 0) || (fromLength == 0))
return string;
var fromIndex = string.indexOf(from);
if (fromIndex < 0)
return string;
var newString = string.substring(0, fromIndex) + to;
if ((fromIndex + fromLength) < stringLength)
newString += stringReplace(string.substring(fromIndex+fromLength, stringLength), from, to);
return newString;
}

9 Siebel EAI and File Attachments
Siebel EAI supports file attachments for exchanging business documents such as sales literature,
activity attachments, and product defect attachments with another Siebel instance or an external
system such as Oracle Applications.
The chapter includes the following topics:
About File Attachments on page 219

Exchange of Attachments with External Applications on page 219
Using MIME Messages to Exchange Attachments on page 220
About the EAI MIME Hierarchy Converter on page 226
About the EAI MIME Doc Converter on page 228
About File Attachments

For example, if you are exchanging service requests with another application or partner, you can
include attachments such as screen captures, email, log files, and contract agreements that are
associated with the service request in the information being exchanged. Siebel EAI support for file
attachments allows comprehensive integration.
In order to use file attachments you first need to create Integration Objects. For information, see
Chapter 2, Integration Objects, and Chapter 3, Creating and Maintaining Integration Objects.
Siebel EAI offers the choice of integrating file attachments using MIME (the industry standard for
exchanging multipart messages), or including the attachment within the body of the XML document,
referred to as an inline XML attachment. Consider using inline XML attachments when integrating
two instances of Siebel applications using file attachments.
Exchange of Attachments with External

Applications
Siebel EAI supports bidirectional attachments exchange with external applications using the
following two message types:
MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions). MIME is the industry standard for
exchanging multipart messages. The first part of the MIME message is an XML document
representing the business object being exchanged and attachments to the object are included as
separate parts of the multipart message. MIME is the recommended choice for integrating Siebel
applications with other applications.

Siebel EAI and File Attachments Using MIME Messages to Exchange Attachments
Inline XML attachments (Inline Extensible Markup Language). With inline XML
attachments, the entire business object you are exchanging, including any attachments, is sent
as a single XML file. In this case, attachments are included within the body of the inline XML
attachment. Consider using inline XML attachments when integrating two instances of Siebel
applications using file attachments. For information, see XML Reference: Siebel Enterprise
Using MIME Messages to Exchange

Attachments
To send or receive file attachments using MIME messages, Siebel EAI uses the MIME Hierarchy
Converter and MIME Doc Converter.
The following checklist shows the high-level procedures you must perform to use MIME to exchange
attachments between Siebel applications and another external system:
Create an integration object using the EAI Siebel Wizard business service.
For information, see Creating an Integration Object on page 220.
Create an inbound or outbound workflow process.
For information, see Creating Workflow Process Examples on page 222.
Test your workflow process using Workflow Process Simulator.
For information, see About the EAI MIME Hierarchy Converter on page 226.
Creating an Integration Object

The following procedure guides you through the steps of creating an integration object.
To create a new Siebel integration object

2 Choose File > New Object to display the New Object Wizards dialog box.
3 Select the EAI tab, and then double-click Integration Object.
The Integration Object Builder wizard appears.

4 Follow the procedure in Creating Integration Objects Using the EAI Siebel Wizard Business Service
on page 40 to create the integration object.
NOTE: When creating your integration object you must select the Attachment integration object.
The following figure illustrates this when the source object is Account.
5 Click Next to see a list of the warnings and errors generated by the Integration Object Builder.
6 Review and take the necessary actions to address any issues.
7 Click Finish.
Siebel Tools builds the integration object.
8 In the Object Explorer, select Integration Object, and then select your new integration object in
the Object List Editor.
9 In the Object Explorer, expand the Integration Object tree to show the Integration Component
object.
10 Select an integration component, expand the Integration Component tree, and then select the
Integration Component Field object.
The Integration Components and Integration Component Fields lists appear.
11 Select the XXX_Attachment Component and the Attachment Id Component fields, and verify that
the Data Type object for the Attachment Id field is set to DTYPE_ATTACHMENT.
12 Compile the SRF file and copy it to the object directory under your Siebel Server directory as well
as under your Tools directory.
NOTE: Stop the services before copying the SRF file. For information on the SRF file, see Using
Siebel Tools.

Creating Workflow Process Examples

Depending on whether you are preparing for an outbound or an inbound attachment exchange,
design different workflow process as described in the following two procedures.
For more information on creating workflow processes, see Siebel Business Process Framework:
Workflow Guide.
Outbound Workflow Process

To process the attachment for an outbound request you must create a workflow process to query the
database, convert the Integration Object and its attachments into a MIME hierarchy, and then create
a MIME document to send to the File Transport business service.
To create an outbound workflow process

1 In Siebel Tools, select the Workflow Process object.
3 Give the new workflow process a name and associate it with a locked project.
4 Right-click, and then choose Edit Workflow Process.
The Workflow Process Designer appears.
5 Create a workflow process consisting of Start, End, and four Business Services. Set up each
Business Service according to the task it needs to accomplish.
6 Define your process properties.
Set workflow process properties when you need a global property for the entire workflow.
Data
Name Type Default String
SiebelMessage Hierarchy
Error Message String
Error Code String
Object Id String
Process Instance Id String
Siebel Operation Object Id String
MIMEHierarchy Hierarchy
SearchSpec String [Account.Name] = 'Sample

Account'
<Value> String Default output is binary.

7 The first business service queries the Account information from the database using the EAI Siebel
Adapter business service with the Query method. This step requires the following input and
output arguments.
Input Property Data

Argument Type Value Property Name Type
Output Literal Sample Account

Integration
Object Name
SearchSpec Process Property SearchSpec String
Property Name Type Output Argument
SiebelMessage Output Argument Siebel Message
NOTE: For more information on using the EAI Siebel Adapter, see Chapter 6, EAI Siebel Adapter
Business Service.
8 The second business service in the workflow converts the Account integration object and its
attachments to a MIME hierarchy using the EAI MIME Hierarchy Converter business service with
the SiebelMessage to MIME Hierarchy method. This step requires the following input and output
arguments.
Input Property Data

Argument Type Property Name Type
Siebel Message Process Property SiebelMessage Hierarchy
MIMEHierarchy Output Argument MIME Hierarchy
NOTE: For more information on the EAI MIME Hierarchy Converter, see About the EAI MIME
Hierarchy Converter on page 226.

9 The third business service of the workflow converts the MIME hierarchy to a document to be sent
to File Transport business service. This step uses the EAI MIME Doc Converter business service
with the MIME Hierarchy To MIME Doc method. This step requires the following input and output
arguments.
Input Argument Type Property Name Property Data Type
MIME Hierarchy Process Property MIMEHierarchy Hierarchy
<Value> Output Argument MIME Message
NOTE: For more information on the EAI MIME Doc Converter, see About the EAI MIME Doc
Converter on page 228.
10 For the final step, set up the last business service of the workflow to write the information into
a file using the EAI File Transport business service with the Send method. This step requires the
following input arguments.
Input Property Property

Argument Type Value Name Data Type
Message Text Process Property <Value> String
File Name Literal c:\temp\account.txt
NOTE: For information on File Transport, see Transports and Interfaces: Siebel Enterprise
Inbound Workflow Process Example

To process the attachment for an inbound request, you must create a workflow process to read the
content from a file, convert the information into a Siebel Message, and send to the EAI Siebel Adapter
to update the database accordingly.
NOTE: When passing the process property value for a workflow process from an external application
(or another business service) as the input property set, the corresponding property name in the input
property set must be same name as the process property and is case sensitive.
To create an inbound workflow process

1 In Siebel Tools, select the Workflow Process object.
3 Give the new workflow process a name and associate it with a locked project.

4 Right-click, and then choose Edit Workflow Process.
The Workflow Process Designer appears.
5 Create a workflow process consisting of Start, End and four Business Services. Set up each
Business Service according to the task it needs to accomplish.
6 Define your process properties.
Set workflow process properties when you need a global property for the entire workflow.
Name Data Type
SiebelMessage Hierarchy
Error Message String
Error Code String
Object Id String
Siebel Operation String

Object Id
MIMEHierarchy Hierarchy
MIMEMsg Binary
7 The first business service in the workflow reads the Account information from a file using the EAI
File Transport business service with Receive method. This step requires the following input and
output arguments.
Input Argument Type Value
File Name Literal c:\temp\account.txt
<Value> Output Argument Message Text
NOTE: For information on File Transport, see Transports and Interfaces: Siebel Enterprise

Siebel EAI and File Attachments About the EAI MIME Hierarchy Converter
8 The second business service of the workflow converts the Account information to a MIME
hierarchy using the EAI MIME Doc Converter business service with the MIME Doc to MIME
Hierarchy method. This step requires the following input and output arguments.
MIME Message Process Property <Value> Binary
MIMEHierarchy Output Argument MIME Hierarchy
9 The third business service of the workflow converts the MIME hierarchy to a document, and sends
it to the EAI Siebel Adapter business service. This step uses the EAI MIME Hierarchy Converter
business service with the MIME Hierarchy to Siebel Message method. This step requires the
following input and output arguments.
MIME Hierarchy Process Property MIMEHierarchy Hierarchy
SiebelMessage Output Argument Siebel Message
10 The last step of the workflow writes the information into the database using the EAI Siebel
Adapter business service with the Insert or Update method. This step requires the following input
argument.
Siebel Message Process Property SiebelMessage Hierarchy
About the EAI MIME Hierarchy Converter

The EAI MIME Hierarchy Converter transforms the Siebel Message into a MIME (Multipurpose Internet
Mail Extensions) hierarchy for outbound integration. For inbound integration, it transforms the MIME
Hierarchy into a Siebel Message.

Siebel EAI and File Attachments About the EAI MIME Hierarchy Converter
Outbound Integration
The EAI MIME Hierarchy Converter transforms the input Siebel Message into a MIME Hierarchy.
Figure 45 illustrates the Siebel Message of a sample Account with attachments. This figure represents
both input and output to the MIME Hierarchy Converter.
Figure 45. Sample Account with Attachments as Input to the MIME Hierarchy Converter
The output of this process is illustrated in Figure 46.
Figure 46. Output of a MIME Hierarchy Converter
The first child of a MIME Hierarchy is the XML format of the Sample Account Integration Object
instance found in the Siebel Message. The remaining two children are the corresponding children
found under Attachments. If there is no child of type Attachments in the Siebel Message, the output
is just a MIME Hierarchy with a child of type Document. This document will contain the XML format
of the Sample Account integration object instance.

Siebel EAI and File Attachments About the EAI MIME Doc Converter
Inbound Integration
The MIME Hierarchy Converter transforms a MIME Hierarchy input into a Siebel Message. For the
inbound process, the first child of the MIME Hierarchy has to be the XML format of the Integration
Object instance; otherwise, an error is generated. Figure 47 illustrates the incoming hierarchy.
Figure 47. Output of a MIME Hierarchy Converter
The output of this process is illustrated in Figure 45 on page 227. The output for this process is the
same as the input.
About the EAI MIME Doc Converter

The MIME Doc Converter converts a MIME Hierarchy into a MIME Message and a MIME Message into
a MIME Hierarchy. A MIME Hierarchy consists of two different types of property sets.
Property Description
MIME Hierarchy Mapping to a MIME multi-part
Document Mapping to MIME basic-part
Table 43 illustrates some examples of how a MIME Message maps to a MIME Hierarchy.

EAI MIME Doc Converter Properties

Table 43. Examples of MIME Message and MIME Hierarchy
MIME Message MIME Hierarchy
MIME-Version: 1.0
Content-Type: application/xml
Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
This is a test.
MIME-Version: 1.0
Content-Type: multipart/related; type="application/

xml"; boundary=--abc
----abc
Content-Type: application/xml
Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
This is test2.
----abc--
The business service needs the following properties on the child property set as shown in Table 44.
These properties reflect the most accurate information on the data contained in the child property
set.

Table 44. Properties for EAI MIME Doc Converter
Property Possible Values Type Description
ContentId Any value Document No Default. The ContentId is the value

used to identify the file attachment when
the receiver parses the MIME message.
When importing attachments, use a
unique value for this property and not
repeat it for the rest of the file
attachments. This is required in the actual
document. This property is automatically
populated when you are exporting an
attachment from a Siebel application.
Extension txt, java, c, C, cc, Document No Default. If ContentType and

CC, h, hxx, bat, rc, ContentSubType are not defined, the
ini, cmd, awk, html, Extension is used to retrieve the
sh, ksh, pl, DIC, appropriate values from this property. If
EXC, LOG, SCP, WT, all three values are specified, the
mk, htm, xml, pdf, ContentType and ContentSubType values
AIF, AIFC, AIFF, AU, override the values retrieved from the
SND, WAV. gif, jpg, Extension. If either the Extension or both
jpeg, tif, XBM, avi, ContentType and ContentSubType are not
mpeg, ps, EPS, tar, specified, the ContentType will be set to
zip, js, doc, nsc, application and ContentSubType will have
ARC, ARJ, B64, BHX, the value of octet-stream.
GZ, HQX

Table 44. Properties for EAI MIME Doc Converter
Property Possible Values Type Description
ContentType application, audio, Document Default is application. The ContentType

image, text, video value has to be specified if you want to set
the content type of the document instead
of using the extension to get a value from
the MIME utility function. If the value is
not provided, the default value is used.
The ContentType of multipart is used to
represent file attachments in a MIME
message. Other forms of values to
describe a multipart is not supported.
ContentSubType plain, richtext, html, Document Default is octet-stream. The

xml (used with ContentSubType value has to be specified
ContentType of Text) if you want to set the content subtype of
the document instead of using the
octet-stream, pdf,
extension to get a value from the MIME
postscript, x-tar, zip,
utility function. If the value is not
x-javascript,
provided the default value is used.
msword, x-
conference, x-gzip
(used with
ContentType of
application)
aiff, basic, wav (used

with ContentType of
audio)
gif, jpeg, tiff, x-

xbitmap (used with
ContentType of
image)
avi, mpeg (used with

ContentType of
video)
NOTE: On the inbound direction, the business service is independent of the transport. It assumes
that the input property set contains the MIME message, and writes a property set representation of
the MIME message. A property set is used to represent each part of the MIME message. When
decoding the MIME message, the business service automatically sets the properties based on the
values in the MIME message.


10 External Business Components

The external business component feature provides a way to access data that resides in a non-Siebel
table or view, using a Siebel business component.
This chapter consists of the following topics:
Process of Configuring External Business Components on page 233
Using Specialized Business Component Methods for EBCs on page 245
Usage and Restrictions for External Business Components on page 246
About Using External Business Components with the Siebel Web Clients on page 247
About Overriding Connection Pooling Parameters for the Data Source on page 247
About Joins to Tables in External Data Sources on page 248
About Distributed Joins on page 249
Loading an Oracle Business Intelligence Presentation Folder for Use as an External Table on
page 250
Troubleshooting External Business Components on page 251
Before continuing with configuring and implementing external business components (EBCs), review
the following books on the Siebel Bookshelf:
Configuring Siebel Business Applications
Siebel Developers Reference

Siebel Tools Online Help
Using Siebel Tools
NOTE: The Siebel Bookshelf is available on Oracle Technology Network (OTN), Oracle E-Delivery, or
it might be installed locally on your intranet, or on a network location.
Process of Configuring External

Business Components
Before proceeding, review Configuring the External Business Component on page 241. To configure
EBCs, you perform the following high-level tasks:

External Business Components Process of Configuring External Business Components
Creating the External Table Definition on page 234.
Import the external table definition into Siebel Tools using the External Table Schema Import
Wizard.
This wizard creates a new Table object definition in the Siebel Repository, based upon the
contents of a DDL (data definition language) file.
As may be appropriate, it is possible to import an external view definition rather than a table
definition. When a view rather than a table definition is imported, it is necessary to amend the
Type property of the created Table definition to reflect External View.
NOTE: You can import a database view definition as well as a table definition here. While no
difference exists in the resulting Siebel Table object, if it references an external database view,
only read access from the Siebel Application is supported.
Mapping External Columns to Siebel System Fields on page 239.
Map columns in the external table or view to Siebel system fields.
NOTE: One column in the external table or view must be mapped to the Id system field by setting
the System Field Mapping property for the column.
Specifying the Data Source Object on page 240.
Configure the table definition and specify the data source object.
The Data Source object is a child object of the Table Object in Siebel Tools and may need to be
exposed in the Object Explorer. For information on exposing objects in the Object Explorer of
Siebel Tools, see Using Siebel Tools.
This object tells the object manager which data source to use to access the object.
Specifying Any Optional Table Properties on page 240.
When the table is imported, specify additional table properties for the corresponding external
table.
Configuring the External Business Component on page 241.

Configure the EBC and specify the data source object. This data source name will be the same
as that specified for the Table object.
Specifying Run-Time Parameters on page 241.
After the data source definition is named in Siebel Tools, specify the run-time parameters by
completing the following:
Configure the data source definition.
Update the server component definition.
Creating the External Table Definition

You use Siebel Tools and the External Table Schema Import Wizard to import your external table
definition into the Siebel Repository.

For more information about using Siebel Tools, see Using Siebel Tools on the Siebel Bookshelf.
This task is a step in Process of Configuring External Business Components on page 233.
To import the external table definition

1 In Siebel Tools, check out and lock the appropriate project.
2 Choose File > New Object.
The New Object Wizards dialog box appears.
3 Click the General tab, and then double-click External Table Schema Import.
The External Table Schema Import Wizard appears.
4 In the External Table Schema Import Wizard, specify the following values:
The project with which the new Table object definition will be associated.
The database where the external table resides. The value specified must correspond to the
database platform used by the Siebel database.
The full path for the location of the SQL/DDL file that contains the external table definition.
Specify the three-digit batch code that allows grouping.
5 Click Next to confirm the entries, and then click Finish to import the DDL file.
A Table object definition is added to the Siebel Repository, corresponding to the external table.
6 Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 for every external table definition you want to import.
About Data Type Mappings for Importing Table Definitions

When importing table definitions, certain data type mappings are supported for use with the Siebel
application. Table 45 contains the data type mappings you can use when importing table definitions.
Table 45. Supported Data Type Mappings by Product
Supported Data Type Siebel Data Type
MS SQL Server Data Types
int Numeric with scale of 0
bigint Numeric with scale of 0
smallint Numeric with scale of 0
tinyint Numeric with scale of 0
float Numeric
real Numeric
decimal Numeric
money Numeric

smallmoney Numeric
bit Numeric with a value of 0 or 1
char Character
nchar Character
varchar Varchar
nvarchar Varchar
text Long
ntext Long
datetime Date Time
smalldatetime Date Time
DB2 Universal Database Data Types
UINT Numeric with scale of 0
BIGUINT Numeric with scale of 0
SMALLUINT Numeric with scale of 0
FLOAT Numeric
REAL Numeric
DECIMAL Numeric
NUMERIC Numeric
CHAR Character
VARGRAPHIC Varchar
LONG VARGRAPHIC Long
CLOB CLOB
DATE Datetime
TIME Datetime
TIMESTAMP Datetime
Oracle Data Types
Number Numeric
TIMESTAMP WITH TIME Numeric

ZONE
TIMESTAMP WITH LOCAL Numeric

TIME ZONE

Char Character
Nchar Character
varchar2 Varchar
nvarchar2 Varchar
Long Long
CLOB CLOB
date Datetime
Oracle Business Intelligence (BI) Server Data Types
Integer Numeric with scale of 0
Smallint Numeric with scale of 0
Tinyint Numeric with scale of 0
Float Numeric
Double Numeric
Bit Character (1)
Boolean Character (1)
Char Character
Varchar Varchar
Longvarchar Long
Datetime Datetime
Date Datetime
Time Datetime

Table 46 contains the data types that are not supported for importing table definitions.
Table 46. Unsupported Data Type Mappings by Product
Database Unsupported Data Types
MS SQL Server timestamp
varbinary
binary
image
cursor
uniqueidentifier
DB2 Universal Database DBCLOB
BLOB
Oracle TIMESTAMP
NCLOB
BLOB
BFILE
ROWID
UROWID
RAW
LONG RAW
INTERVAL YEAR TO MONTH
INTERVAL DAY TO SECOND

Oracle BI Server Timestamp
Varbinary
Longvarbinary
Binary
Object
Unknown
About the New Imported Table Definition

After the table definition is imported using the External Table Schema Import Wizard, the external
table and the external column names are generated.
The external table name is stored in the Table objects Alias property. This external table name
consists of the following:

An EX prefix (for external table)
A three-digit batch code specified in the External Table Schema Import Wizard
An automatically generated seven-digit number
An example of the Table name is EX_ABC_0000001.
The external column name is stored in the Column child objects Alias property. An X is added as the
prefix and a four-digit number is added as the suffix for the external column name, for example,
X_ABC_0000001_0001.
The Table objects Type property is set to External or External View (if a view was imported). This
column denotes that the table resides outside of the Siebel database.
Mapping External Columns to Siebel System Fields

When the EBC is defined, you must map the Siebel applications system fields to the corresponding
external table column. System Field mapping is accomplished at the column level, rather than using
business component user properties. Specify the System Field Mapping column attribute if you want
to map a Siebel system field to a column.
NOTE: At a minimum, the Id field must be mapped to a unique column defined in the external table
and in the Table object definition, which is specified in the business components Table property.
By default, the Siebel applications system fields are not included in the generated SQL for external
tables.
System Field Mapping is used to specify the mapping between table columns and Siebel internal
fields.
The following is a list of the Siebel applications internal fields that may be mapped to external table
columns:
Conflict Id. (Optional).
Created. (Optional) Datetime corresponding to when the record was created.
Created By. (Optional) String containing the user name of the person and the system that
created the records.
Extension Parent Id. (Optional).
Mod Id. (Optional).
Non-system. (Optional).
Updated. (Optional) Datetime corresponding to when the record was last updated.
Updated By. (Optional) String containing the user name of the person and system that last
updated the record.

Id. Mandatory. The single column unique identifier of the record. A column in the external table
must be mapped to the Id field.
NOTE: The System Field Mapping property should be used in conjunction with external tables only.
Specifying the Data Source Object

When the external table has been defined, specify the data source for the corresponding external
table. The Data Source child object of the Table object specifies the data source for the corresponding
external table:
The Data Source child object corresponds to a data source defined in the application
configuration file (.cfg) or in the Application - Server Configuration screen > Profile Configuration
view.
The Data Source child object instructs the Application Object Manager to use the data source for
a specific table. If a Data Source child object is not specified, the default data source for the
application will be used.
NOTE: The Data Source child object is specified for external tables only.
For more information about the Data Source child object, see Siebel Tools Online Help.
Specifying Any Optional Table Properties

When the table is imported, you may specify additional table properties for the corresponding
external table:
External API Write. Allows you to perform reads directly from the database and have write
operations processed by way of a script.
A Boolean property is used to indicate whether or not inserts, updates, or deletes to external
tables should be handled by an external API. If this property is set to TRUE, the
BusComp_PreWriteRecord and BusComp_PreDeleteRecord events should be scripted to publish
the insert, update, or delete operation to an external API.
Key Generation Business Service. Allows a business service to generate a primary key (Id
field) for a business component. If this is not specified, the Siebel application will generate a
row_id value for the column that corresponds to the Id system field.
Key Generation Service Method. Allows a business service method to be invoked when
generating a primary key for a business component.
For more information about these table properties, see Siebel Tools Online Help.

Configuring the External Business Component

When a Table object definition corresponding to the external table exists in the repository, you can
configure a business component to use the new Table object definition.
In general, configuring an EBC is similar to configuring a standard business component with the
following exceptions:
Data Source business component property. Specify the Data Source business component
property. Set the value for this property to the name of the corresponding Table Data Source.
Log Changes property. Set the Log Changes property to False (unchecked). This will prevent
Siebel Remote or Replication transactions from being created. (The default is true.)
Intersection table. When configuring a many-to-many relationship, the intersection table

resides in the same database instance as the child table.
CSSBusComp class. It is recommended that all EBCs use the CSSBusComp class.
NOTE: Substituting a Siebel-provided table with an external table can result in significant
downstream configuration work, and in some cases can restrict or prevent the use of standard
functionality provided for the Siebel Business Applications.
Specifying Run-Time Parameters

After the data source definition is named in Siebel Tools, you specify the run-time parameters by
configuring the data source definition, and updating the server component definition.
If testing using the Siebel Developer Web Client, add a [DataSource] section to the client .cfg file.
Configuring the Data Source Definition

As part of specifying the run-time parameters, configure the data source definition.
To configure the data source definition

1 Navigate to Administration - Server Configuration > Enterprises > Profile Configuration.
2 Copy an existing InfraDatasources named subsystem type.
3 Change the Profile and Alias properties to the Data Source name configured in Siebel Tools.
4 Update the profile parameters to correspond to the external RDBMS:
DSConnectString = data source connect string
For the Microsoft SQL Server or the IBM DB2 databases, create an ODBC or equivalent
connection and input the name of this in the parameter.

For an Oracle RDBMS, this value should specify the TNS name associated with the
database and not an ODBC or other entry.
DSSQLStyle = database SQL type
See Table 47 on page 244 for a listing of the supported SQL types.
DSDLLName = DLL Name corresponding to the SQL type
See Table 47 on page 244 for a listing of the supported connector Dynamic Link Library (DLL)
names and SQL Styles.
DSTableOwner = data source table owner
DSUsername = default user name used for connections (Optional)
DSPassword = default password used for connections (Optional)
NOTE: The DSUsername and the DSPassword parameters are optional. However, to avoid
receiving a log in prompt when accessing the external data source, specify DSUsername and the
DSPassword. If specified, this will override the default user name and password.
The DSUsername and the DSPassword parameters are activated only when using the Database
Security Adapter. For more information, see Configuring a User in LDAP or ADSI Security Adapter To
Access EBCs.
Configuring a User in LDAP or ADSI Security Adapter To Access EBCs

It is not a good idea to assume that the login to your primary data source is always the same as the
login to the external data source.
If you are using the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) or the Microsoft Active Directory
Service Interfaces (ADSI) setup for the Siebel application and you try to access an EBC, the security
adapter is called to authorize the user trying to access the external database.
When LDAP or ADSI authentication is used, the username and password values for the external data
source is provided in the ADSI SharedCredentialsDN parameter and the CredentialAttributeType
attribute.
For example, the name of your external data source is: MyExtDataSrc, and your ADSI is configured
with the following parameters:
SharedCredentialsDN= cn=sharedcred,ou=people,dc=siebel,dc=com
CredentialAttributeType = mail
In your ADSI server modify the mail attribute for the following entry:
cn=sharedcred,ou=people,dc=siebel,dc=com
Before modifying, one value must already exist (assuming sadmin and db2 are the user name and
password for the ServerDataSrc data source, which is the primary data source):
type=ServerDataSrc username=sadmin password=db2
Add additional values to the mail attribute (assuming mmay and mmay are the user name and password
for the MyExtDataSrc data source, which is the external data source):
type=MyExtDataSrc username=mmay password=mmay

After adding the new value for the external data source to the mail attribute, you are able to access
EBCs.
Configuring the Data Source Definition for the Siebel Developer Web Client
If testing using the Siebel Developer Web Client, add a [DataSource] section to the client .cfg file for
the data source definition named in Siebel Tools. In this example, WindyCity is the data source being
added.
To configure the data source definition in the Siebel Developer Web Client
1 Add the data source definition named in Siebel Tools. In this example, the data source definition
named is WindyCity:
[DataSources]
Local = Local
Sample = Sample
ServerDataSrc = Server
GatewayDataSrc = Gateway
WindyCity = WindyCity
2 In the data source section of the applications .cfg file, add the following parameters:
[WindyCity]
Docked = TRUE
ConnectString = data source connect string
SqlStyle = database SQL type (for the supported SQL types, see Table 47 on page 244)
TableOwner = data source table owner
DLL = DLL Name corresponding to the SQL type (for the supported connector DLL
names, see Table 47 on page 244)
DSUsername = user id (Optional)
DSPassword = password (Optional)

Supported Connector DLL Names and SQL Styles

When defining the DLL and SQL files for importing the external schema, the external database being
used might not be the same as the Siebel database. Table 47 contains the supported connector DLL
names and the corresponding SQL styles.
Table 47. Supported Connector DLL Names and SQL Styles
External Database DLL Name SQL Style
IBM DB2 sscddcli.dll DB2
Microsoft SQL Server sscdms80.dll MSSqlServer
Oracle. sscdo90.dll Oracle
Use for Oracle databases.
Oracle. sscdo90.dll OracleCBO
Use for Oracle databases with NOTE: OracleCBO should only be

cost-based optimization. used with an Oracle 9i (or later)
instance, because the parameter
values used are different in
earlier versions.
Oracle Business Intelligence sscdsacon.dll Siebel Analytics Server

(BI) Server
SQL Anywhere sscdw9.dll Watcom
Updating the Server Component to Use the New Data Source

As part of specifying the run-time parameters, update the server component to use the new data
source.
To update the server component to use the new data source

1 Navigate to Administration - Server Configuration > Enterprises > Component Definitions.
2 In the Component Definitions list applet, select your Application Object Manager Component. For
example, select the Call Center Object Manager (ENU).
3 Choose Start Reconfiguration from the Menu drop-down list on the Component Definitions list
applet.
The Definition State of the component will be set to Reconfiguring. Reselect your application
component after selecting the Start Reconfiguring menu item.

External Business Components Using Specialized Business Component Methods for
EBCs
4 In the Component Parameters list applet, query for OM - Named Data Source name, and update
the Value by adding the alias name of the data source specified in the To configure the data
source definition section.
The format of the OM - Named Data Source name parameter is a comma-delimited list of data
source aliases. It is recommended that you do not modify the default values, and that you add
their new data sources to the preexisting list.
5 After the parameter values are reconfigured, commit the new configuration by selecting Commit
Reconfiguration from the Menu drop-down list on the Component Definitions list applet.
The new parameter values are merged at the enterprise level.
To cancel the reconfiguration before it has been committed, select Cancel Reconfiguration from
the Menu drop-down list on the Component Definitions list applet.
Using Specialized Business Component

Methods for EBCs
The following are the specialized business component methods that are supported for use with EBCs:
IsNewRecordPending
GetOldFieldValue
SetRequeryOnWriteFlag (PreWriteRecord event)
SetRequeryOnWriteFlag (WriteRecord event)
IsNewRecordPending Business Component Method

This method can be invoked by using a script in the PreWriteRecord event to determine if the current
record is newly created. If the record is a new record, this method returns the value TRUE.
An example script for the use of this method follows:
var isNewRecord = this.InvokeMethod("IsNewRecordPending");
GetOldFieldValue Business Component Method

This method can be invoked by using a script in the PreWriteRecord event to retrieve an old field
value if needed. This invoke method takes an input parameter, which must be a valid field name, and
returns a string containing the old field value.
var oldLoc = this.InvokeMethod("GetOldFieldValue", "Location");

External Business Components Usage and Restrictions for External Business
Components
SetRequeryOnWriteFlag (PreWriteRecord event) Business

Component Method
In the PreWriteRecord event, this method can be used to put the business component into a mode
where the current record refreshes from the data source after the write operation. EBCs typically use
this method to refresh database sequencing column values on new record operations. This invoke
method takes an input parameter of TRUE or FALSE.
var requery = this.InvokeMethod("SetRequeryOnWriteFlag", "TRUE");
SetRequeryOnWriteFlag (WriteRecord event) Business Component

Method
In the WriteRecord event, this method informs the object manager that the write operation to the
data source is processed by using a script rather than a database connector. At the end of the
operation, the business component invoke method, SetRequeryOnWriteFlag, can be invoked again
with the FALSE parameter to reset the requery on write mode, if needed.
var extWrite = this.InvokeMethod("SetRequeryOnWriteFlag", "TRUE");

// insert script here to commit the record via an mechanism channel
var resetWrite = this.InvokeMethod("SetRequeryOnWriteFlag", "FALSE");
Usage and Restrictions for External

Business Components
The following usage guidelines and restrictions apply to EBCs:
Creating and populating the external table is the responsibility of the customer. Consult your
database administrator for the appropriate method to use.
EBCs cannot be docked, so they do not apply to mobile users on the Siebel Mobile Web Client.
Siebel Remote is not supported.
EBCs support many-to-many relationships with the limitation that for such relationships the
intersection table must be from the same data source as the child business component.
EBCs cannot be loaded using the Enterprise Integration Manager.
EBCs rely on the Business Object Layer of the Siebel Architecture. Therefore, EBCs are used only
in Siebel Server components using this layer such as the Application Object Manager (for
example, the Call Center Object Manager), Workflow Process Manager, and so on. EBCs are not
used on components not using this layer such as Workflow Policies (the Workflow Monitor agent),
Assignment Manager, Incentive Compensation, and so on.
The Id field must be mapped to an underlying column in the external table in order to support
insert, update, delete, and query operations.

External Business Components About Using External Business Components with the
Siebel Web Clients
Using the Oracle Sequence Object to populate the Id system field is not supported. The value of
the Id system field has to be known by the object manager at the record commit time, while the
Oracle Sequence Object value is populated by the database server when the change is being
processed inside the data base.
If the column that was mapped to the Id system field has Primary Key checked, then row_id
values are generated by the object manager. Otherwise, a user-entered row_id value is assumed,
and the object manager does not generate a row_id value for it.
However, in either configuration, the Primary Key column should not use the Oracle Sequence
Object.
For EBCs that contain multivalue groups, if a primary join is enabled, then both the parent and
the child business components must be from the same data source. Multivalue groups are also
supported as long as such configuration does not require that a distributed join or a subquery be
performed.
Siebel visibility control (for example ViewMode) is not supported for EBCs.
An external join alias must have the same name as the name used for the external table.
EBCs based on Database views can be used for queries only, updates are not supported.
NOTE: Significant configuration effort and changes may be required if you choose to reconfigure a
standard Siebel business component on an external table. For example, existing join and link
definitions are unlikely to function, because the source fields and underlying columns may not exist
in the external table.
About Using External Business

Components with the Siebel Web Clients
If EBCs are used with the Siebel Web or Mobile Web Clients, new data sources corresponding to the
data sources specified for the external tables need to be added to the specific Siebel application
configuration file. If the user name and password for the external data source are different from the
current data source, a log-in window appears to initiate logging into the external data source.
About Overriding Connection Pooling

Parameters for the Data Source
Overriding the connection pooling parameters for the data source is supported. If connection pooling
is enabled for the component, but should be turned off for the data source, set to zero (0) the
following:
DB Multiplex - Max Number of Shared DB Connections (DSMaxSharedDbConns)
DB Multiplex - Min Number of Shared DB Connections (DSMinSharedDbConns)
DB Multiplex - Min Number of Dedicated DB Connections (DSMinTrxDbConns) parameters for the

data source

External Business Components About Joins to Tables in External Data Sources
About Joins to Tables in External Data

Sources
Joins from business components, based on the default data source to a table in an external data
source, are supported in the Siebel application.
Like other joined fields, the fields based on the join to the EBC are read-only.
The limitations for joining business components to tables in an external data source are as follows:
The source field for the join must be based on a table in the default data source.
The destination column of the join must be the column mapped to System Field Id.
Multiple single join specifications are not supported for the join to the external table.
Reverse navigation (for example, a call to go to the last record) is not supported when fields from
multiple data sources are active.
Join Constraints are supported. Joins to more than one external table may be specified. However,
increasing the number of external joined data sources can cause degradation in performance.
Searching and Sorting on Fields Joined to External Tables

Fields based on a join to an external table can be searched and sorted. However, limitations do exist.
The limitations for searching and sorting on fields joined to an external table follow:
All fields in the sort specification must either be based on columns in the same external table, or
be based on columns in the default data source.
Named search specifications cannot be set on fields from an external data source.
Performance tests are recommended if searching and sorting are permitted on fields based on joins
to the external tables. The Siebel application does not have information on the data shape in the
external tables. The Siebel application follows a rule-based approach to decide the order in which to
query the external tables.
For example, consider the case where there are search and sort specifications on the fields in the
Siebel Data Source but none on the fields from the external data source. The Siebel application
decides to query the Siebel tables first. Only the rows matching the query specification in the current
workset are retrieved from the external data source. As more rows are retrieved from the tables in
the Siebel Data Source, the rows from the external data source are also retrieved.
The rules become complex when Search and Sort Specifications are applied to multiple data sources.
The rules followed are based on the following requirements:
1 Retrieving the first few rows quickly
2 Shipping the least amount of data between the Siebel and external data sources
3 Eliminating a sort step
Step 2 and Step 3 may produce competing results. In that case, Step 2 takes precedence.

External Business Components About Distributed Joins
If, as result of the search and sort specifications in effect, the external table on which the Sort is
based is not the driving table, the Siebel application raises an error if more than 1000 rows are
retrieved. Refine the query specification in the event of this error.
Directives specified using the Business Component User property External DataSource Field Priority
On Search to allow hinting of the order in which the tables in the data sources should be queried are
supported. These directives may be applied based on a knowledge of the data shape in the Siebel
and external tables.
For example, using the following property values:
Property Value
External DataSource Field Priority On Search: FieldA 1
External DataSource Field Priority On Search: FieldB 2
A query on Field A is likely to be selective. If there is a search specification on Field A, the table that
field A is based on is considered the driving table.
A query on Field B is likely to be selective. If there is a search specification on Field B and none on
Field A, the table that field B is based on is considered the driving table.
About Distributed Joins

Just as join objects can be configured in Siebel Tools and represent a 1:1 relationship between tables
resident within the Siebel data model, join objects can be configured to represent a 1:1 relationship
with tables external to the Siebel database. A distributed join is a 1:1 relationship between tables
that spans two relational data sources. This allows a single, logical record to span multiple data
sources. In using distributed joins, the join fields are read-only, and the join specification can consist
only of a single field. This federated field support provides the ability for the Object Manager to
perform the cross-database join.
Distributed joins are configured the same as standard joins. The query is distributed when the Data
Source child object of the table provides a hint to the Object Manager (OM) to federate the query.
Configuring Distributed Joins and Federated Fields

To configure distributed joins, you perform the following high-level tasks:
Implement the external data source (similar to what was done for EBCs).
The Datasource child object of the Table provides a hint to the object manager to federate the
query.
Create the Join.
Add the fields to the business component.

External Business Components Loading an Oracle Business Intelligence Presentation
Folder for Use as an External Table
To configure distributed joins and federated fields

1 Create the Join point to your external table.
2 Create the Join Specification.
This is similar to what you do when creating a standard Siebel join.
3 Add Field to Business Component.
Add the fields from the external table to the business component using the join specified.
Usage Guidelines and Restrictions for Distributed Joins

The following usage guidelines and restrictions apply to distributed joins:
The source field for the distributed join must be based on a table in the business components
data source.
The destination column of the distributed join must be a column mapped to the Id System Field.
Multiple join specifications are not supported for a distributed join. However, join constraints are
supported.
Inner join is not supported for a distributed join.
Reverse navigation (for example, a call to go to the last record) is not supported when the fields
from multiple data sources are active.
All fields in the sort specification must be from the same data source.
All fields in the named search specifications must be from the default data source.
Loading an Oracle Business Intelligence

Presentation Folder for Use as an
External Table
An EBC is a tool that derives its data from an external relational data source. In Siebel Tools, the
structure of the external table is imported using the External Table Schema Import wizard.
EBCs, in conjunction with the Analytics database connector, allow the ability to construct business
components that derive their data from Oracle Business Intelligence (BI). EBCs support Oracle BI as
a source for having Siebel Tools import the structure of an Oracle BI Presentation Folder by reading
sources such as an XML file.
NOTE: Analytics integration is read-only, and any business components that use Analytics as a data
source must be configured to support read-only access.
The following procedure generates the Oracle BI Presentation folder as an XML file from Oracle BI.
Follow these instructions to avoid the Repository Documentation wizard exporting the full repository
definition into an XML file, and not only the selected object.

External Business Components Troubleshooting External Business Components
To load an Oracle BI presentation folder for use as an external table

1 Start the Oracle Business Intelligence Administration Tool.
2 Choose File > New and create a new repository file.
3 Choose File > Import from Repository:
a Choose the appropriate repository and click Next.
b When requested, type the log in and password.
c Select the object Catalog from the drop-down list.
d Choose the catalog you want to import into Siebel Tools and click Add With Children.
e Click Next.
f Click Finish.
4 Choose Tools > Utilities, choose Repository Documentation and click Execute.
5 In the Save as Type field, select XML as the file extension.
6 Give a new name to the file and click Save.
If you import an XML file that contains several presentation folders, Siebel Tools creates one external
table for each presentation folder.
Troubleshooting External Business

Components
As you create EBCs, it is recommended that you consider the following steps:
1 Configure EBCs for read and make sure that the data is displayed correctly in the application.
If the development team feels that some fields require script in order to display correctly then
defer the implementation of these fields until testing is complete for a simple read.
2 Add any data transformation script or configuration required in order to provide read access to
the more complex fields for display.
3 Configure EBCs for update and make sure that the data is stored correctly in the external
database(s) and displayed correctly in the Siebel application.
Do not add any validation logic to the EBC at this time.
4 Once testing of data update is complete, establish any data transformation configuration or script
required to update the fields.
Make sure that the configuration uses script, which is preferred. However, it is recommended that
any data transformation scripts be written on the Pre event.
Data manipulation configuration and scripts should be attached to Post events.
As part of the troubleshooting process associated with EBCs, increasing the tracing level for a
number of component events is suggested.

External Business Components Troubleshooting External Business Components
To increase the tracing level of component events

1 Navigate to Administration - Server Configuration > Servers > Components > Events and select
the object manager being used.
2 Change the Log Level for the following Event Types to a higher value (the default is 1).
Initially a value of 4 is recommended.
Task Configuration
DBC Log
SQL
Object Manager DB Connection Operation Log
General Object Manager Log
Object Manager Session Operation and SetErrorMsg Log
Object Manager SRF Operation and SetErrorMsg Log
Security Adapter Log
Following this change, restarting the affected components is recommended. With the increase log
level, more information is stored in the relevant log files. Reset these values back to 1 when
troubleshooting is completed.

A Predefined EAI Business

Services
Siebel Business Applications provide a number of business services. These services do not require
any modification, but they do require that you choose and configure them to suit your requirements.
For general information on using business services, see Chapter 4, Business Services.
Table 48 presents the predefined Siebel EAI business services.
Table 48. Predefined EAI Business Services
Business Service Class Description
EAI XSD Wizard CSSXMLSchemaWizard Used to create integration objects

based on XSD files.
EAI XML XSD Generator CSSEAISchXSDService Used to generate an XSD file from an
integration object.
EAI Transaction Service CSSBeginEndTransactionService EAI Transaction service for working

with Siebel transactions, such as
begin and end, to find out whether in
transaction.
EAI MSMQ Transport CSSMsmqTransService EAI MSMQ Transport.
EAI MQSeries Server CSSMqSrvTransService EAI MQSeries Server Transport.

Transport
EAI HTTP Transport CSSHTTPTransService EAI HTTP Outbound Transport. For

information, see Transports and
Interfaces: Siebel Enterprise
EAI Siebel Adapter CSSEAISiebelAdapterService EAI Siebel Adapter. For information,

see Chapter 6, EAI Siebel Adapter
Business Service.
EAI UI Data Adapter CSSEAIUDAdapterService EAI UI Data Adapter. For information,

see Chapter 7, EAI UI Data Adapter
Business Service.
EAI Query Spec Service CSSEAIQuerySpecService Used internally by the EAI Siebel
Adapter to convert the SearchSpec
method argument as a string to an
Integration Object Instance that the
EAI Siebel Adapter can use as a Query
By Example object.

Predefined EAI Business Services
EAI Import Export CSSEAIImportExportService EAI Import Export Service (import

and export integration object from or
to XML).
EAI BTS COM Transport CSSEAIBtsComService EAI Siebel to BTS COM Transport.
EAI DLL Transport CSSDllTransService EAI DLL Transport. For information,

see Transports and Interfaces: Siebel
Enterprise Application Integration.
EAI Data CSSDataTransformationEngine EAI Data Transformation Engine

Transformation Engine (DTE). For information, see Business
Processes and Rules: Siebel
The display name for this business

service is EAI Data Mapping Engine.
EAI Null Envelope CSSEAINullEnvelopeService EAI Null Envelope Service. For

Service information, see XML Reference:
Siebel Enterprise Application
Integration.
Siebel Message CSSEAISMEnvelopeService EAI Siebel Message Envelope Service.

Envelope For information, see XML Reference:
Integration.
EAI Dispatch Service CSSEAIDispatchService Dispatch Service. For information, see

Business Processes and Rules: Siebel
EAI Integration Object CSSEAIIntObjHierCnvService EAI Integration Object Hierarchy (also

to XML Hierarchy known as SiebelMessage) to XML
Converter hierarchy converter service. For
information, see XML Reference:
Integration.
EAI MIME Hierarchy CSSEAIMimePropSetService EAI MIME Hierarchy Conversion

Converter Service. For information, see
Chapter 9, Siebel EAI and File
Attachments.
EAI MIME Doc CSSEAIMimeService MIME Document Conversion Service.

Converter For information, see Chapter 9,
Siebel EAI and File Attachments.

EAI XML Converter CSSEAIXMLCnvService Converts between XML and EAI

Messages. For information, see XML
Reference: Siebel Enterprise
EAI XML Write to File CSSEAIXMLPrtService Print a property set to a file as XML.
For information, see XML Reference:
Integration.
EAI XML Read from File CSSEAIXMLPrtService Read an XML file and parse to a
property set. For information, see
XML Reference: Siebel Enterprise
XML Converter CSSXMLCnvService Converts between XML documents

and arbitrary Property Sets. For
information, see XML Reference:
Integration.
XML Hierarchy CSSXMLCnvService Converts between XML documents

Converter and XML Property Set or Arbitrary
Property Set. For information, see
XML Reference: Siebel Enterprise


B Property Set Representation of

Integration Objects
Property sets are in-memory representations of integration objects. This appendix describes the
relationship between the property set and the integration object. For an overview of property sets,
see Using Siebel Tools.
This appendix consists of the following topics:
Property Sets and Integration Objects on page 257
Example Instance of an Account Integration Object on page 260
Property Sets and Integration Objects

Many EAI business services operate on integration object instances. Because business services take
property sets as inputs and outputs, it is necessary to represent integration objects as property sets.
The mapping of integration objects, components, and fields to property sets is known as the
Integration Object Hierarchy.
Using this representation, you can pass a set of integration object instances of a specified type to an
EAI business service. You pass the integration object instances as a child property set of the business
service method arguments. This property set always has a type of SiebelMessage. You can pass the
SiebelMessage property set from one business service to another in a workflow without knowing the
internal representation of the integration objects.

Property Set Representation of Integration Objects Property Sets and Integration
Objects
Property Set Node Types

When passing integration object instances as the input or output of a business service, you can use
property sets to represent different node types, as presented in Table 49.
Table 49. Property Set Node Types
Value of Type
Name Parent Attribute Properties Description
Service Method Not applicable Ignored The properties of This is the top-
Arguments this property set level property set
contain the service of a business
specific services input or
parameters, such output. The
as PrimaryRowId properties of this
for the EAI Siebel property set
Adapter. contain the
service-specific
parameters (for
example,
PrimaryRowId for
the EAI Siebel
Adapter).
SiebelMessage Service Method SiebelMessage The properties of This property set is

Arguments this property set a wrapper around
contain header a set of integration
attributes object instances of
associated with a specified type. To
the integration pass integration
object, for objects between
example, two business
IntObjectName. services in a
workflow, this
property set is
copied to and from
a workflow process
property of type
Hierarchy.
Object List SiebelMessage ListOfObjectType Not used. This property set

identifies the
object type that is
being represented.
The root
components of the
object instances
are children of this
property set.

Property Set Representation of Integration Objects Property Sets and Integration
Objects
Table 49. Property Set Node Types
Value of Type
Name Parent Attribute Properties Description
Root Object List Root Component The property This property set
Component Name names of the represents the
property set root component of
represent the field an integration
names of the object instance.
component, and
the property
values are the field
values.
Child Root ListOfComponent Not used. An integration

Component Component or Name component can
Type Component have a number of
child component
types, each of
which can have
zero or more
instances. The
Integration Object
Hierarchy format
groups the child
components of a
given type under a
single property
set. This means
that child
components are
actually
grandchildren of
their parent
components
property set.
Child Child Component Name The property This property set

Components Component names of the represents a
Type property set component
represent the field instance. It is a
names of the grandchild of the
component, and parent
the property components
values are the field property set.
values.

Property Set Representation of Integration Objects Example Instance of an Account
Integration Object
Example Instance of an Account

Integration Object
This example shows an Account integration object in which the object has two component types:
Account and Business Address (which is a child of Account). The hierarchy of component types, from
the perspective of Oracles Siebel Tools, looks like that shown in Figure 48.
Figure 48. Sample Account Integration Object
Figure 49 on page 261 shows an example instance of this object type, using the Integration Object
Hierarchy representation. There are two Sample Account instances. The first object instance has an
Account component and two Business Address child components. The second object instance has
only an Account component with no child components.

Integration Object
Figure 49. Partial Instance of Sample Account Integration Object

Integration Object

C DTDs for XML Gateway Business

Service
This appendix lists the various inbound and outbound DTDs for the XML Gateway business service.
It covers the following topics:
Outbound DTDs for the XML Gateway Business Service on page 263
Inbound DTDs for the XML Gateway Business Service on page 265
Outbound DTDs for the XML Gateway

Business Service
The following sections contain examples of DTDs representing the %methodName% request sent
from the XML Gateway to the external application.
Delete
The following DTD is for the Delete request:
<!ELEMENT siebel-xmlext-delete-req (buscomp, remote-source, row)>
<!ELEMENT buscomp (#PCDATA)>
<!ATTLIST buscomp id NMTOKEN #REQUIRED>
<!ELEMENT remote-source ( #PCDATA )*>
<!ELEMENT row (value+)>
<!ELEMENT value (#PCDATA)*>
<!ATTLIST value field CDATA #REQUIRED>
Init
The following DTD is for the Init request:
<!ELEMENT siebel-xmlext-fields-req (buscomp, remote-source?)>
<!ATTLIST buscomp id NMTOKEN #REQUIRED >
<!ELEMENT remote-source (#PCDATA)*>
Insert
The following DTD is for the Insert request:

DTDs for XML Gateway Business Service Outbound DTDs for the XML Gateway Business
Service
<!ELEMENT siebel-xmlext-insert-req (buscomp, remote-source?, row)>
PreInsert
The following DTD is for the PreInsert request:
<!ELEMENT siebel-xmlext-preinsert-req (buscomp, remote-source?)>
<!ATTLIST buscomp id NMTOKEN #REQUIRED >
Query
The following DTD is for the Query request:
<!ELEMENT siebel-xmlext-query-req (buscomp , remote-source?, max-rows?, search-

string?, match?, search-spec?, sort-spec? )>
<!ELEMENT max-rows (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT search-string (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT match (#PCDATA)>
<!ATTLIST match field CDATA #REQUIRED>
<!ELEMENT search-spec (node)>
<!ELEMENT node (#PCDATA | node)*>
<!ATTLIST node node-type (Constant | Identifier | Unary Operator | Binary Operator)

#REQUIRED>
<!ATTLIST node value-type (TEXT | NUMBER | DATETIME | UTCDATETIME | DATE | TIME)

#IMPLIED>

DTDs for XML Gateway Business Service Inbound DTDs for the XML Gateway Business
Service
<!ELEMENT sort-spec (sort+)>
<!ELEMENT sort (#PCDATA)>
<!ATTLIST sort field CDATA #REQUIRED>
Update
The following DTD is for the Update request:
<!ELEMENT siebel-xmlext-update-req (buscomp, remote-source?, row)>
<!ATTLIST value changed ( true | false ) #REQUIRED>
Inbound DTDs for the XML Gateway

Business Service
The following sections contain examples of DTDs representing the %methodName% response sent
from the external application to the XML Gateway.
Delete Response
The following DTD is for the Delete response:
<!ELEMENT siebel-xmlext-dekete-ret EMPTY >
Init Response
The following DTD is for the Init response:
<!ELEMENT siebel-xmlext-fields-ret (support+)>
<!ELEMENT support EMPTY >
<!ATTLIST support field CDATA #REQUIRED>
Insert Response
The following DTD is for the Insert response:

DTDs for XML Gateway Business Service Inbound DTDs for the XML Gateway Business
Service
<!ELEMENT siebel-xmlext-preinsert-ret (row)>
<!ATTLIST value field CDATA #REQUIRED >
PreInsert Response
The following DTD is for the PreInsert response:
<!ELEMENT siebel-xmlext-preinsert-ret (row)>
<!ELEMENT row (value)*>
Query Response
The following DTD is for the Query response:
<!ELEMENT siebel-xmlext-query-ret (row*)>
Update Response
The following DTD is for the Update response:
<!ELEMENT siebel-xmlext-update-ret (row)>
<!ELEMENT value (#PCDATA)>

Index
Symbols of 117
%methodName% request, sample outbound external data, creating from 117
DTDs 263 integration object maintenance, about 52
%methodName% response, sample inbound relation to business services 65
DTDs 265 structure of 18
* (asterisk), using as querying wildcard 119 user key requirement 30
business service methods
arguments, defining 69
A business objects as arguments 76
activating fields, about 40 defining 69
AllowedIntObjects business service user described 66
property 36 Business Service Methods screen, using 71
application business service methods, custom
external application, about setting up 195 See also virtual business components
arguments about 195
Init method, XML Gateway business common input parameters (table) 196
service 186 connecting methods, list of 195
IsPrimaryMVG 145 Delete method, example 197
AssocFieldName user property Error Return property set, example 198
associations with 20 Init method, example 199
Association user property Insert method, example 201
associations with 20 output parameters (table) 196
association, defined 20 PreInsert method, example 203
Query method, example 205
B Update method, example 209
base object types, for integration Business Service Simulator, running 73
components (table) 15 business services
base table, using Mod Id 153 accessing using Siebel eScript or Siebel
body data, contents of 14 VB 74
buscomp Id tag 187 argument types 70
Business Component Id argument, XML customized business services, type of 66
Gateway method 186 defined 65
Business Component Name argument, XML deploying as Web services 72
Gateway method 186 deploying to run-time database from Data
business components Access Service wizard 177
association, role of 20 deploying to run-time database from WSDL
integration restrictions 61 Import Wizard 87
linking 24 EAI MIME Hierarchy Converter, creating
multivalue field example 22 inbound workflow process
multivalue group example 25 (example) 226
relation to business services 65 EAI MIME Hierarchy Converter, creating
specialized 181 outbound workflow process
update permission rules 35 (example) 223
business objects EAI Siebel Adapter, about 117
business service methods, as arguments EAI Siebel Wizard, about 38
to 76 EAI UI Data Adapter, about 157
EAI Siebel Adapter business service, role general uses 65

Index C
importing and exporting in Siebel Tools 73 CSSEAIMimePropSetService class 254

importing into the Siebel application 73 CSSEAIMimeService class 254
predefined business services, table of 253 CSSEAINullEnvelopeService class 254
property set code example 75 CSSEAIQuerySpecService class 253
property sets, about and role of 67 CSSEAISiebelAdapterService class 253
scripts, writing 70 CSSEAISMEnvelopeService class 254
Siebel Business Application, creating in 71 CSSEAIUDAdapterService class 253
Siebel Tools, creating process overview 68 CSSEAIXMLCnvService class 255
Siebel Tools, defining in 68 CSSEAIXMLPrtService class 255
Specialized Business Services, about 66 CSSHTTPTransService class 253
testing 73 CSSMqSrvTransService class 253
user properties, defining 70 CSSMsmqTransService class 253
XML Gateway 183 CSSXMLCnvService class
BusObjCacheSize argument, about 142, XML Converter business service 255
143, 175 XML Hierarchy Converted business
service 255
C custom business service
calculated fields 27 Delete method, example 197
CamelCase, choosing naming convention 43 sample code 211
child integration components
about 18 D
structure example 19 Data Access Service wizard, using to expose
child property sets, about 67 Siebel data to external
classes applications 176
associated with predefined EAI business data and arguments, contrasted 75
services (table) 253 Data Type Definitions
CSSBCVExtern 182 See DTDs
CSSBCVXMLExten 186 databases
CSSEAIDTEScriptService 66 access, controlling 36
components, defined 13 multivalued attributes 21
concurrency control Delete business service method
about support for 152 custom business service example 197
Account_Organization integration component DTD example 263
example 156 overview 131
configuring 154 XML code example 132
configuring example 155 Delete Response method, DTD example 265
Modification IDs, using 153 DeleteByUserKey argument, about 142, 143
Modification Key, about 152 DeleteLeaves business service method
ContentId property, value and EAI UI Data Adapter business service 171
description 230 Display Name field 67
ContentSubType property 231 docking, restrictions on 181
ContentType property 231 DOC-literal support 81
CSEEAISiebelAdapterService class 36 DTDs
CSSBCVExtern class 182 Integration Object Builder wizard, about 17
CSSBCVXMLExten class 186 sample inbound DTDs 265
CSSBeginEndTransactionService class 253 sample outbound DTDs 263
CSSDataTransformationEngine class 254
CSSDllTransService class 254 E
CSSEAIBtsComService class 254 EAI BTS COM Transport business
CSSEAIDispatchService class 254 service 254
CSSEAIDTEScriptService class 66 EAI Data Mapping Engine business
CSSEAIImportExportService class 254 service 254
CSSEAIIntObjHierCnvService class 254 EAI Design project, editing integration

Index E
objects, caution 18 Execute method 173

EAI Dispatch Service business service 254 exposing Siebel data to external
EAI DLL Transport business service 254 applications 176
EAI HTTP Transport InitLeaves method 166
business service, description 253 InsertLeaves method 168
XML Gateway business service, configuring for method arguments (table) 175
use by 184 method arguments, table of 175
EAI Import Export business service 254 methods, list of 158
EAI Integration Object to XML Hierarchy predefined EAI business services, table
Converter business service 254 of 253
EAI MIME Doc Converter business QueryPage method 159
service 254 Update Leaves method 164
EAI MIME Hierarchy Converter business EAI XML Converter business service 255
service 254 EAI XML Read from File business
EAI MQSeries Server Transport business service 255
service 253 EAI XML Write to File business service 255
EAI MQSeries Transport, configuring for use Error Return property set example 198
by XML Gateway business ErrorOnNonExistingDelete argument,
service 184 about 142, 143
EAI MSMQ Transport business service 253 error-text tag 192
EAI MSMQ Transport, configuring for use by eScript
XML Gateway business service 184 See scripts, Siebel eScript
EAI Query Spec Service business Execute business service method
service 253 EAI UI Data Adapter business service 173
EAI Siebel Adapter business service overview 132
about 117 Execute method
concurrency control, about support for 152 operations (table) 132
database access, controlling 36 specifying and supported parent and child
Delete method 131 components (table) 133
Execute method, overview 132 ExecutionMode argument
Insert method, overview 129 about 142
IsPrimaryMVG argument 145 ExecutionMode argument, about 143, 175
language-independent code, using 147 Extensible Markup Language (XML), link to
method arguments (table) 142 reference material 80
methods, list of 118 Extension property, value and
Modification IDs, using 153 description 230
Modification Key, about 152 extension table, using Mod Id 153
multivalue groups external application
predefined EAI business services, table sample inbound DTDs 265
of 253 sample outbound DTDs 263
QueryPage method, overview 120 setting up, about 195
run-time events, about using 148 external business components (EBCs)
Synchronize method, overview 121 configuration process 233
Update method, overview 131 configuring 241
Upsert method, overview 130 creating external table definition 234
XML code example 132 distributed joins 248, 249
EAI Siebel Wizard business service distributed joins, configuring 249
about 38 distributed joins, usage and restrictions 250
integration objects, creating 40 joins to tables in external data sources 248
EAI Transaction Service business loading Oracle Business Intelligence
service 253 presentation folder 250
EAI UI Data Adapter business service overriding connection parameters for the data
about 157 source 247
DeleteLeaves method 171 troubleshooting 250, 251

Index F
usage and restrictions 246 instance, defined 13

using specialized business component integration component fields
methods 245 defined 14
using with Siebel Web Client 247 field names, assigning 26
external data source, specifying 183 multivalue groups, working with 24
External Name user property 20 integration component keys
See user keys
F integration components
field, defined 13 activating 39
fields best practices and scenarios 62
activating and inactivating 40 component fields, viewing 43
calculated 27 defined 14
integration component fields, viewing 43 deleting during synchronization 50
multivalue groups, working with 24 inner joins 28
picklist, validating and example 26 multivalue groups, working with 24
property set fields 67 selecting 42
user keys, about 30 update permission rules 35
file attachments integration messages
See also MIME body data 14
message types 219 defined 13
using 219 header data 14
force active fields, performance Integration Object Builder wizard
considerations 61 about 17
function code sample 76 Code Generator wizard 17
EAI Siebel Wizard 39
Generate XML Schema wizard 17
H integration components, selecting 42
header data, contents of 14 integration objects, creating 40
Hierarchy Parent key, about and user keys, about building 30
example 35 user keys, validating 31
Hierarchy Root key, about and example 35 integration object instance
Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), link to actual data, about and diagram 16
reference material 80 defined 13
integration objects
I See also child integration components
inactivating fields, about 40 about 14
incoming XML format, tags and descriptions base object types (table) 15
(table) 192 calculated fields 27
Init method, DTD example 263 Container Naming Convention menu 42
Init property set example 199 creating 40
Init Response method, DTD example 265 creating, based on another root business
InitLeaves business service method component 44
EAI UI Data Adapter business service 166 creating, with many-to-many business
Inline XML attachments 220 component 44
inner joins, and integration components 28 defined 13
input parameters, common (table) 196 deploying to run-time database from Data
Input/Output type 70 Access Service wizard 177
Insert business service method deploying to run-time database from EAI
EAI Siebel Adapter business service 129 Siebel Wizard 43
Insert business service method, DTD deploying to run-time database from Siebel
example 263 Tools 46
Insert property set example 201 deploying to run-time database from WSDL
InsertLeaves business service method Import Wizard 87
EAI UI Data Adapter business service 168 EAI Design project, editing caution 18

Index J
external data, creating from 117 M

fine-tuning practices, list of 45 many-to-many relationships, virtual
in-memory updating 48 business components 181
instance example 260 MessageId argument
integration components, deleting during described 143
synchronization 50 locating arguments for 142
Lower CamelCase for XML tags checkbox 43 metadata
maintaining, about 52 defined 14
metadata, about synchronizing 47 integration objects, updating 53
metadata, relation to 16 processing example 75
MIME message objects, creating 220 relation to integration objects 16
performance considerations 60 synchronizing, integration objects, about 47
picklist, validating and example 26 method arguments
primaries, about setting 29 EAI Siebel Adapter business service
property set representation 257 (table) 142
removing from run-time database 47 EAI UI Data Adapter business service
schema, generating 59 (table) 175
simple hierarchy example 260 methods
structure example 19 business objects as arguments 76
synchronizing with business objects 53 business service method arguments,
System fields, about treatment of 61 defining 69
terminology 13 business service method arguments, types
testing newly created integration object 46 of 70
undeploying from run-time database 47 business services methods, about 66
update permission rules 35 business services methods, defining 69
updating 53 EAI Siebel Adapter business service,
validating 45 supported methods 118
wizards process diagram 17 EAI UI Data Adapter business service,
integration projects supported methods 158
integration objects, use described 18 incoming XML tags by method 192
planning 14 outgoing XML tags by method 187
IntObjectName argument XML Gateway business service method
described 143 arguments (table) 186
locating arguments for 142 XML Gateway business service methods,
IsPrimaryMVG argument 145 listed 185
MIME
J about 219
Java class files, generating 17 EAI MIME Doc Converter properties
joined table, using Mod Id 153 (table) 229
inbound workflow process, creating
L (example) 224
integration objects, creating 220
language-independent code
messages and hierarchies 228
list of values, types of 147
MIME hierarchy, converting to 226
outbound and inbound direction, about
outbound workflow process, creating
using 147
(example) 222
LastPage argument, about 142, 143
workflow process properties, create an
links
inbound workflow process 225
associations, and 20
workflow process properties, create an
between business components 24
outbound workflow process 222
update permission rules 35
MIME Doc Converter
LOVLanguageMode argument, about 175
about 228
LOVs, language-independent code
converting hierarchy to document 224
translation 147

Index N
converting to a hierarchy 226 Account_Organization integration component

EAI MIME Doc Converter properties example 156
(table) 229 configuring for concurrency control 154
properties 231 example 155
MIME hierarchy MVGAssociation integration components
converting hierarchy to document 224 Account_Organization integration component
converting to a hierarchy 226 example 156
EAI MIME Doc Converter properties configuring for concurrency control 154
(table) 229 example 155
inbound transformation 228 MVGAssociation user property
integration object, converting to MIME about 20
hierarchy 223 MVG, creating a Siebel integration component
MIME Doc Converter 228 to represent 25
outbound transformation 226
property sets 228 N
MIME Hierarchy Converter NamedSearchSpec argument, about 175
business service, creating inbound workflow name-value pairs
process (example) 226 concatenating 184
business service, creating outbound workflow role in property sets 67
process (example) 223 NewQuery argument 143
inbound transformation 228 NewQuery argument, about 175
outbound transformation 226 No envelope business service 254
mobile users and virtual business NumOutputObjects argument
components 181 described 143
Modification Key locating arguments for 142
about 152 NumOutputObjects argument, about 176
Account_Organization integration component
example 156
Mod Id field, using for tables 153 O
MVG and MVGAssociation integration outgoing XML format, tags and descriptions
components, configuring 154 (table) 186
MVG and MVGAssociation integration Output Integration Object Name argument,
components, configuring about 144
example 155 output parameters, (table) 196
Multi Value Link field 23 Output type 70
Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions OutputIntObjectName argument,
See MIME about 142, 176
multivalue groups
See also integration objects P
EAI Siebel Adapter business service, PageSize
overview 145 EAI Siebel Adapter business service method
example 22 argument 144
field names, assigning 26 locating arguments for 142
integration components, creating 24 parameters
multiple fields 24 common input parameters (table) 196
primary record, setting 146 output parameters (table) 196
types of 21 Parameters argument, XML Gateway
update permission rules 35 method 186
virtual business components, restriction 181 parent business component
multivalue links, setting primaries 29 multivalue group example 24
multivalued attributes 21 multivalue group field names, assigning 26
MVG parent integration component
See multivalue groups about 18
MVG integration components identifying 43

Index Q
structure example 19 QueryPage business service method

performance EAI UI Data Adapter business service 159
force-active fields, considerations 61 overview 120
integration object considerations 60
picklist considerations 61 R
picklists Remote Source argument, XML Gateway
performance considerations 61 method 186
validating, about and example 26 Remote Source user property
PreInsert method, DTD example 264 virtual business component 183
PreInsert property set example 203 XML Gateway business service 184
PreInsert Response method, DTD REPOSITORY_BC_VIEWMODE_TYPE 36
example 265, 266 root component
primaries, about setting 29 See parent integration component
primary business component 18 row tag 194
primary integration component RPC-literal support 81
See parent integration component run-time database
PrimaryRowId argument deploying business services to 87, 177
described 144 deploying integration objects to 43, 46, 87,
locating arguments for 142 177
property sets run-time events, about using 148
about 257
about and role of 67
child 67 S
code sample 75 schema
Delete method example 197 Generate XML wizard 17
Display Name field 67 generating 59
EAI MIME Doc Converter properties scripts
(table) 229 business service, attaching to 70
Error Return example 198 business service, using to access 74
fields 67 SearchSpec argument
hierarchy example 260 described 144
Init example 199 locating arguments for 142
Insert example 201 ServerDetermine session type, about 103
integration objects, and 257 Service Name user property
MIME hierarchy 228 virtual business component 182
nodes types (table) 258 XML Gateway business service 184
PreInsert example 203 Service Parameters user properties, table
Query example 205 of 184
Update example 209 Service Parameters user property
virtual business component 182
XML Gateway business service 184
Q Siebel Business Application, defining
Query method business services 71
business component records, about querying Siebel business component, defined 14
all 119 Siebel business objects
DTD example 264 defined 14
wildcard querying, about using asterisk structure of 18
(*) 119 Siebel EAI
query operation See individual EAI entries
integration component keys, role of 30 Siebel eScript
role in integration projects 18 using to access a business service 74
Query property set example 205 using to invoke Web services 95
Query Response method, DTD example 266 Siebel integration components
QueryByUserKey argument, about 142, 144 See integration components

Index T
Siebel integration objects status-code tag 192

See integration objects StatusObject argument
Siebel Message envelope business described 144
service 254 locating arguments for 142
Siebel Message object SWSE
See integration object instance See Siebel Web Server Extension (SWSE)
Siebel Tools synchronization process
business services, creating process about 47
overview 68 in-memory updating 48
business services, defining 68 integration object components, deleting 50
integration objects, creating 40 integration objects, updating 53
user key, identifying 30 role in integration projects 18
virtual business component, creating 182 update rules, about 48
Siebel VB, using to access a business Synchronize business service method,
service 74 overview 121
Siebel Web Server Extension (SWSE) 102, System fields, about treatment of 61
109
enabling Session Management 106 T
SiebelMessage argument tables, using Mod Id 153
EAI Siebel Adapter business service method testing business services 73
argument 144 transports, used with XML Gateway 183
locating arguments for 142
SiebelMessage argument, about 176
siebel-xmlext-fields-req tag 187 U
siebel-xmlext-fields-ret tag 193 UI Data Sync (UDS) Web Services, about and
siebel-xmlext-Insert-req tag 188 using Data Access Service
siebel-xmlext-insert-ret tag 193 wizard 176
siebel-xmlext-preinsert-req tag 188 Update business service method
siebel-xmlext-preinsert-ret tag 193 overview 131
siebel-xmlext-query-req tag 189 Update Leaves business service method
siebel-xmlext-query-ret tag 194 EAI UI Data Adapter business service 164
siebel-xmlext-status tag 192 Update method
siebel-xmlext-Update-req tag 190 DTD example 265
siebel-xmlext-Update-ret tag 195 Update property set example 209
Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) Update Response method, DTD
about 80 example 266
custom filters 110 Upsert business service method
header examples 106 overview 130
link to reference material 80 XML code example 132
passing localization information in user keys
headers 109 building and validating, example 31
Siebel Authentication and Session defined 30
Management headers 102 definitions, confirming after integration object
simulation, business service 73 creation 37
SortSpec argument field in Siebel Tools 30
EAI Siebel Adapter business service method Hierarchy Parent key, about and example 35
argument 144 Hierarchy Root key, about and example 35
locating arguments for 142 inactivating, caution 34
Specialized Business Services, about 66 Integration Component key 30
StartRowNum argument locating in Tables screen 31
EAI Siebel Adapter business service method Object Builder wizard, about building with 30
argument 144 status keys, about 34
locating arguments for 142 validity, checking 31
status keys, about 34 user properties

Index V
AssocFieldName 20 W
Association 20 Web services
business service user properties, defining 70 about 79
External Name 20 cache refresh 113
MVGAssociation 20 consuming external Web services 86
virtual business components (table) 182 custom SOAP filters 108, 110
virtual business components, defining defining Web Service Inbound Dispatcher 85
for 183 deploying business services as 72
DOC-literal support 81
V enabling tracing 113
value tag 194 generating a WSDL file 85
VBC Compatibility Mode user property 184 invoking using an external system 83
VBCs. See virtual business components invoking, examples of 92, 94
ViewMode argument Local Business Service 92
EAI Siebel Adapter business service method one-way operations 82
argument 144 outbound, administration 88
locating arguments for 142 outbound, creating based on WSDL file 86
ViewMode argument, about 176 outbound, integration objects as input
ViewMode integration object user arguments 91
property 36 publishing inbound 83
virtual business components RPC-literal support 81
See also virtual business components, security support 98
methods Session Management SOAP headers 102
about 179 Siebel Authentication 102
custom code example 211 single sign-on authentication 109
docking restrictions 181 SOAP fault message example 85
external application setup, about 195 support for transport headers 91
incoming XML format, tags and descriptions using Data Access Service wizard to expose
(table) 192 Siebel data to external
mobile users, restriction 181 applications 176
MQSeries, implementing with 184 XML schema support for the <xsd:any>
multivalue groups 181 tag 92
new virtual business component, Web Services Description Language (WSDL)
creating 182 about 79
outgoing XML format, tags and descriptions consuming an external Web service using the
(table) 186 WSDL Import Wizard 86
specialized business components, generating a WSDL file 85
restriction 181 importing a WSDL file 86
user properties (table) 182 invoking an external Web service 94
user properties, defining 183 link to reference material 80
XML Gateway business service, Web Services Interoperability (WS-I)
configuring 184 standard, link to reference
virtual business components, methods material 80
See also virtual business components Web Services Security (WS-Security)
Delete method example 197 standard
Error Return property set, example 198 link to reference material 80
Init method, example 199 support for UserName Token
Insert method, example 201 mechanism 100
PreInsert property set, example 203 workflows
Query property set, example 205 inbound MIME request 224
Update property set, example 209 outbound MIME request 222
virtual business services policies, about using 148
See business service methods WSDL Import Wizard

Index X
deploying business services 87 See also XML format

deploying integration objects 87 about 183
invoking an external Web service 94 configuring 184
using to consume an external Web incoming XML tags and descriptions 192
service 86 init method arguments 186
methods (table) 185
X methods arguments (table) 186
XML name-value pairs, concatenating 184
attribute-named operation, specifying 133 outgoing XML tags and descriptions 187
business services, importing and sample inbound DTDs 265
exporting 73 sample outbound DTDs 263
Generate XML Schema wizard 17 Virtual Business Component, implementing
Inline XML attachments 220 with MQSeries 184
metadata example 75 XML Hierarchy Converter business
upsert and delete code example 132 service 255
XML Converter business service 255 XML Schema standard, link to reference
XML format material 80
incoming tags and descriptions (table) 192 XSD container elements, choosing naming
outgoing tags and descriptions (table) 186 convention 42
XML Gateway business service

EAI2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EAI2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EAI2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

For Oracle internal distribution only

Copyright 2005, 2008, Oracle. All rights reserved.

Integration Platform Technologies: Siebel Enterprise Application Integration 1

Chapter 1: Whats New in This Release

Chapter 2: Integration Objects

Chapter 3: Creating and Maintaining Integration Objects

Integration Platform Technologies: Siebel Enterprise Application 3

Validating Integration Objects 45

Chapter 4: Business Services

4 Integration Platform Technologies: Siebel Enterprise Application

Chapter 5: Web Services

Integration Platform Technologies: Siebel Enterprise Application 5

Chapter 6: EAI Siebel Adapter Business Service

Chapter 7: EAI UI Data Adapter Business Service

6 Integration Platform Technologies: Siebel Enterprise Application

Chapter 8: Siebel Virtual Business Components

Chapter 9: Siebel EAI and File Attachments

Chapter 10: External Business Components

Integration Platform Technologies: Siebel Enterprise Application 7

Specifying Run-Time Parameters 241

Appendix A: Predefined EAI Business Services

Appendix B: Property Set Representation of Integration

Appendix C: DTDs for XML Gateway Business Service

8 Integration Platform Technologies: Siebel Enterprise Application

1 Whats New in This Release

Whats New in Integration Platform Technologies: Siebel Enterprise

Integration Components and If an integration component is based on an intersection table,

Creating Integration Objects Using Enhanced functionality includes:

Choosing a naming convention for XSD container

Choosing a naming convention for XML tags

Integration Platform Technologies: Siebel Enterprise Application 9

Creating an Outbound Web Service Enhanced functionality includes:

Deploying proxy business services to the Siebel run-time

Corrected the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for

10 Integration Platform Technologies: Siebel Enterprise Application

Parentheses, including nested parentheses

EXISTS, NOT EXISTS

IS NULL, IS NOT NULL

Integration Platform Technologies: Siebel Enterprise Application 11

NOTE: MS SQL Server does not define a CLOB type. CLOBs

The connector Dynamic Link Library (DLL) for SQL Anywhere

12 Integration Platform Technologies: Siebel Enterprise Application

The chapter consists of the following topics:

About Integration Object Terminology on page 13

About Integration Objects on page 14

About Integration Object Base Object Types on page 15

About Integration Object Wizards on page 16

About the Structure of Integration Objects on page 18

About Permission Flags for Integration Components on page 35

About EAI Siebel Adapter Access Control on page 36

About Integration Object Terminology

Table 2. Integration Objects Terminology

Integration message A bundle of data consisting of two major parts:

Header information that describes what should be done with or to the

Instances of integration objects; that is, data in the structure of the

Integration Platform Technologies: Siebel Enterprise Application 13

Table 2. Integration Objects Terminology

Siebel integration A constituent part of a Siebel integration object.

About Integration Objects

When planning your integration project, consider several issues: